cm-help.en.txt 309 KB

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485868788899091929394959697989910010110210310410510610710810911011111211311411511611711811912012112212312412512612712812913013113213313413513613713813914014114214314414514614714814915015115215315415515615715815916016116216316416516616716816917017117217317417517617717817918018118218318418518618718818919019119219319419519619719819920020120220320420520620720820921021121221321421521621721821922022122222322422522622722822923023123223323423523623723823924024124224324424524624724824925025125225325425525625725825926026126226326426526626726826927027127227327427527627727827928028128228328428528628728828929029129229329429529629729829930030130230330430530630730830931031131231331431531631731831932032132232332432532632732832933033133233333433533633733833934034134234334434534634734834935035135235335435535635735835936036136236336436536636736836937037137237337437537637737837938038138238338438538638738838939039139239339439539639739839940040140240340440540640740840941041141241341441541641741841942042142242342442542642742842943043143243343443543643743843944044144244344444544644744844945045145245345445545645745845946046146246346446546646746846947047147247347447547647747847948048148248348448548648748848949049149249349449549649749849950050150250350450550650750850951051151251351451551651751851952052152252352452552652752852953053153253353453553653753853954054154254354454554654754854955055155255355455555655755855956056156256356456556656756856957057157257357457557657757857958058158258358458558658758858959059159259359459559659759859960060160260360460560660760860961061161261361461561661761861962062162262362462562662762862963063163263363463563663763863964064164264364464564664764864965065165265365465565665765865966066166266366466566666766866967067167267367467567667767867968068168268368468568668768868969069169269369469569669769869970070170270370470570670770870971071171271371471571671771871972072172272372472572672772872973073173273373473573673773873974074174274374474574674774874975075175275375475575675775875976076176276376476576676776876977077177277377477577677777877978078178278378478578678778878979079179279379479579679779879980080180280380480580680780880981081181281381481581681781881982082182282382482582682782882983083183283383483583683783883984084184284384484584684784884985085185285385485585685785885986086186286386486586686786886987087187287387487587687787887988088188288388488588688788888989089189289389489589689789889990090190290390490590690790890991091191291391491591691791891992092192292392492592692792892993093193293393493593693793893994094194294394494594694794894995095195295395495595695795895996096196296396496596696796896997097197297397497597697797897998098198298398498598698798898999099199299399499599699799899910001001100210031004100510061007100810091010101110121013101410151016101710181019102010211022102310241025102610271028102910301031103210331034103510361037103810391040104110421043104410451046104710481049105010511052105310541055105610571058105910601061106210631064106510661067106810691070107110721073107410751076107710781079108010811082108310841085108610871088108910901091109210931094109510961097109810991100110111021103110411051106110711081109111011111112111311141115111611171118111911201121112211231124112511261127112811291130113111321133113411351136113711381139114011411142114311441145114611471148114911501151115211531154115511561157115811591160116111621163116411651166116711681169117011711172117311741175117611771178117911801181118211831184118511861187118811891190119111921193119411951196119711981199120012011202120312041205120612071208120912101211121212131214121512161217121812191220122112221223122412251226122712281229123012311232123312341235123612371238123912401241124212431244124512461247124812491250125112521253125412551256125712581259126012611262126312641265126612671268126912701271127212731274127512761277127812791280128112821283128412851286128712881289129012911292129312941295129612971298129913001301130213031304130513061307130813091310131113121313131413151316131713181319132013211322132313241325132613271328132913301331133213331334133513361337133813391340134113421343134413451346134713481349135013511352135313541355135613571358135913601361136213631364136513661367136813691370137113721373137413751376137713781379138013811382138313841385138613871388138913901391139213931394139513961397139813991400140114021403140414051406140714081409141014111412141314141415141614171418141914201421142214231424142514261427142814291430143114321433143414351436143714381439144014411442144314441445144614471448144914501451145214531454145514561457145814591460146114621463146414651466146714681469147014711472147314741475147614771478147914801481148214831484148514861487148814891490149114921493149414951496149714981499150015011502150315041505150615071508150915101511151215131514151515161517151815191520152115221523152415251526152715281529153015311532153315341535153615371538153915401541154215431544154515461547154815491550155115521553155415551556155715581559156015611562156315641565156615671568156915701571157215731574157515761577157815791580158115821583158415851586158715881589159015911592159315941595159615971598159916001601160216031604160516061607160816091610161116121613161416151616161716181619162016211622162316241625162616271628162916301631163216331634163516361637163816391640164116421643164416451646164716481649165016511652165316541655165616571658165916601661166216631664166516661667166816691670167116721673167416751676167716781679168016811682168316841685168616871688168916901691169216931694169516961697169816991700170117021703170417051706170717081709171017111712171317141715171617171718171917201721172217231724172517261727172817291730173117321733173417351736173717381739174017411742174317441745174617471748174917501751175217531754175517561757175817591760176117621763176417651766176717681769177017711772177317741775177617771778177917801781178217831784178517861787178817891790179117921793179417951796179717981799180018011802180318041805180618071808180918101811181218131814181518161817181818191820182118221823182418251826182718281829183018311832183318341835183618371838183918401841184218431844184518461847184818491850185118521853185418551856185718581859186018611862186318641865186618671868186918701871187218731874187518761877187818791880188118821883188418851886188718881889189018911892189318941895189618971898189919001901190219031904190519061907190819091910191119121913191419151916191719181919192019211922192319241925192619271928192919301931193219331934193519361937193819391940194119421943194419451946194719481949195019511952195319541955195619571958195919601961196219631964196519661967196819691970197119721973197419751976197719781979198019811982198319841985198619871988198919901991199219931994199519961997199819992000200120022003200420052006200720082009201020112012201320142015201620172018201920202021202220232024202520262027202820292030203120322033203420352036203720382039204020412042204320442045204620472048204920502051205220532054205520562057205820592060206120622063206420652066206720682069207020712072207320742075207620772078207920802081208220832084208520862087208820892090209120922093209420952096209720982099210021012102210321042105210621072108210921102111211221132114211521162117211821192120212121222123212421252126212721282129213021312132213321342135213621372138213921402141214221432144214521462147214821492150215121522153215421552156215721582159216021612162216321642165216621672168216921702171217221732174217521762177217821792180218121822183218421852186218721882189219021912192219321942195219621972198219922002201220222032204220522062207220822092210221122122213221422152216221722182219222022212222222322242225222622272228222922302231223222332234223522362237223822392240224122422243224422452246224722482249225022512252225322542255225622572258225922602261226222632264226522662267226822692270227122722273227422752276227722782279228022812282228322842285228622872288228922902291229222932294229522962297229822992300230123022303230423052306230723082309231023112312231323142315231623172318231923202321232223232324232523262327232823292330233123322333233423352336233723382339234023412342234323442345234623472348234923502351235223532354235523562357235823592360236123622363236423652366236723682369237023712372237323742375237623772378237923802381238223832384238523862387238823892390239123922393239423952396239723982399240024012402240324042405240624072408240924102411241224132414241524162417241824192420242124222423242424252426242724282429243024312432243324342435243624372438243924402441244224432444244524462447244824492450245124522453245424552456245724582459246024612462246324642465246624672468246924702471247224732474247524762477247824792480248124822483248424852486248724882489249024912492249324942495249624972498249925002501250225032504250525062507250825092510251125122513251425152516251725182519252025212522252325242525252625272528252925302531253225332534253525362537253825392540254125422543254425452546254725482549255025512552255325542555255625572558255925602561256225632564256525662567256825692570257125722573257425752576257725782579258025812582258325842585258625872588258925902591259225932594259525962597259825992600260126022603260426052606260726082609261026112612261326142615261626172618261926202621262226232624262526262627262826292630263126322633263426352636263726382639264026412642264326442645264626472648264926502651265226532654265526562657265826592660266126622663266426652666266726682669267026712672267326742675267626772678267926802681268226832684268526862687268826892690269126922693269426952696269726982699270027012702270327042705270627072708270927102711271227132714271527162717271827192720272127222723272427252726272727282729273027312732273327342735273627372738273927402741274227432744274527462747274827492750275127522753275427552756275727582759276027612762276327642765276627672768276927702771277227732774277527762777277827792780278127822783278427852786278727882789279027912792279327942795279627972798279928002801280228032804280528062807280828092810281128122813281428152816281728182819282028212822282328242825282628272828282928302831283228332834283528362837283828392840284128422843284428452846284728482849285028512852285328542855285628572858285928602861286228632864286528662867286828692870287128722873287428752876287728782879288028812882288328842885288628872888288928902891289228932894289528962897289828992900290129022903290429052906290729082909291029112912291329142915291629172918291929202921292229232924292529262927292829292930293129322933293429352936293729382939294029412942294329442945294629472948294929502951295229532954295529562957295829592960296129622963296429652966296729682969297029712972297329742975297629772978297929802981298229832984298529862987298829892990299129922993299429952996299729982999300030013002300330043005300630073008300930103011301230133014301530163017301830193020302130223023302430253026302730283029303030313032303330343035303630373038303930403041304230433044304530463047304830493050305130523053305430553056305730583059306030613062306330643065306630673068306930703071307230733074307530763077307830793080308130823083308430853086308730883089309030913092309330943095309630973098309931003101310231033104310531063107310831093110311131123113311431153116311731183119312031213122312331243125312631273128312931303131313231333134313531363137313831393140314131423143314431453146314731483149315031513152315331543155315631573158315931603161316231633164316531663167316831693170317131723173317431753176317731783179318031813182318331843185318631873188318931903191319231933194319531963197319831993200320132023203320432053206320732083209321032113212321332143215321632173218321932203221322232233224322532263227322832293230323132323233323432353236323732383239324032413242324332443245324632473248324932503251325232533254325532563257325832593260326132623263326432653266326732683269327032713272327332743275327632773278327932803281328232833284328532863287328832893290329132923293329432953296329732983299330033013302330333043305330633073308330933103311331233133314331533163317331833193320332133223323332433253326332733283329333033313332333333343335333633373338333933403341334233433344334533463347334833493350335133523353335433553356335733583359336033613362336333643365336633673368336933703371337233733374337533763377337833793380338133823383338433853386338733883389339033913392339333943395339633973398339934003401340234033404340534063407340834093410341134123413341434153416341734183419342034213422342334243425342634273428342934303431343234333434343534363437343834393440344134423443344434453446344734483449345034513452345334543455345634573458345934603461346234633464346534663467346834693470347134723473347434753476347734783479348034813482348334843485348634873488348934903491349234933494349534963497349834993500350135023503350435053506350735083509351035113512351335143515351635173518351935203521352235233524352535263527352835293530353135323533353435353536353735383539354035413542354335443545354635473548354935503551355235533554355535563557355835593560356135623563356435653566356735683569357035713572357335743575357635773578357935803581358235833584358535863587358835893590359135923593359435953596359735983599360036013602360336043605360636073608360936103611361236133614361536163617361836193620362136223623362436253626362736283629363036313632363336343635363636373638363936403641364236433644364536463647364836493650365136523653365436553656365736583659366036613662366336643665366636673668366936703671367236733674367536763677367836793680368136823683368436853686368736883689369036913692369336943695369636973698369937003701370237033704370537063707370837093710371137123713371437153716371737183719372037213722372337243725372637273728372937303731373237333734373537363737373837393740374137423743374437453746374737483749375037513752375337543755375637573758375937603761376237633764376537663767376837693770377137723773377437753776377737783779378037813782378337843785378637873788378937903791379237933794379537963797379837993800380138023803380438053806380738083809381038113812381338143815381638173818381938203821382238233824382538263827382838293830383138323833383438353836383738383839384038413842384338443845384638473848384938503851385238533854385538563857385838593860386138623863386438653866386738683869387038713872387338743875387638773878387938803881388238833884388538863887388838893890389138923893389438953896389738983899390039013902390339043905390639073908390939103911391239133914391539163917391839193920392139223923392439253926392739283929393039313932393339343935393639373938393939403941394239433944394539463947394839493950395139523953395439553956395739583959396039613962396339643965396639673968396939703971397239733974397539763977397839793980398139823983398439853986398739883989399039913992399339943995399639973998399940004001400240034004400540064007400840094010401140124013401440154016401740184019402040214022402340244025402640274028402940304031403240334034403540364037403840394040404140424043404440454046404740484049405040514052405340544055405640574058405940604061406240634064406540664067406840694070407140724073407440754076407740784079408040814082408340844085408640874088408940904091409240934094409540964097409840994100410141024103410441054106410741084109411041114112411341144115411641174118411941204121412241234124412541264127412841294130413141324133413441354136413741384139414041414142414341444145414641474148414941504151415241534154415541564157415841594160416141624163416441654166416741684169417041714172417341744175417641774178417941804181418241834184418541864187418841894190419141924193419441954196419741984199420042014202420342044205420642074208420942104211421242134214421542164217421842194220422142224223422442254226422742284229423042314232423342344235423642374238423942404241424242434244424542464247424842494250425142524253425442554256425742584259426042614262426342644265426642674268426942704271427242734274427542764277427842794280428142824283428442854286428742884289429042914292429342944295429642974298429943004301430243034304430543064307430843094310431143124313431443154316431743184319432043214322432343244325432643274328432943304331433243334334433543364337433843394340434143424343434443454346434743484349435043514352435343544355435643574358435943604361436243634364436543664367436843694370437143724373437443754376437743784379438043814382438343844385438643874388438943904391439243934394439543964397439843994400440144024403440444054406440744084409441044114412441344144415441644174418441944204421442244234424442544264427442844294430443144324433443444354436443744384439444044414442444344444445444644474448444944504451445244534454445544564457445844594460446144624463446444654466446744684469447044714472447344744475447644774478447944804481448244834484448544864487448844894490449144924493449444954496449744984499450045014502450345044505450645074508450945104511451245134514451545164517451845194520452145224523452445254526452745284529453045314532453345344535453645374538453945404541454245434544454545464547454845494550455145524553455445554556455745584559456045614562456345644565456645674568456945704571457245734574457545764577457845794580458145824583458445854586458745884589459045914592459345944595459645974598459946004601460246034604460546064607460846094610461146124613461446154616461746184619462046214622462346244625462646274628462946304631463246334634463546364637463846394640464146424643464446454646464746484649465046514652465346544655465646574658465946604661466246634664466546664667466846694670467146724673467446754676467746784679468046814682468346844685468646874688468946904691469246934694469546964697469846994700470147024703470447054706470747084709471047114712471347144715471647174718471947204721472247234724472547264727472847294730473147324733473447354736473747384739474047414742474347444745474647474748474947504751475247534754475547564757475847594760476147624763476447654766476747684769477047714772477347744775477647774778477947804781478247834784478547864787478847894790479147924793479447954796479747984799480048014802480348044805480648074808480948104811481248134814481548164817481848194820482148224823482448254826482748284829483048314832483348344835483648374838483948404841484248434844484548464847484848494850485148524853485448554856485748584859486048614862486348644865486648674868486948704871487248734874487548764877487848794880488148824883488448854886488748884889489048914892489348944895489648974898489949004901490249034904490549064907490849094910491149124913491449154916491749184919492049214922492349244925492649274928492949304931493249334934493549364937493849394940494149424943494449454946494749484949495049514952495349544955495649574958495949604961496249634964496549664967496849694970497149724973497449754976497749784979498049814982498349844985498649874988498949904991499249934994499549964997499849995000500150025003500450055006500750085009501050115012501350145015501650175018501950205021502250235024502550265027502850295030503150325033503450355036503750385039504050415042504350445045504650475048504950505051505250535054505550565057505850595060506150625063506450655066506750685069507050715072507350745075507650775078507950805081508250835084508550865087508850895090509150925093509450955096509750985099510051015102510351045105510651075108510951105111511251135114511551165117511851195120512151225123512451255126512751285129513051315132513351345135513651375138513951405141514251435144514551465147514851495150515151525153515451555156515751585159516051615162516351645165516651675168516951705171517251735174517551765177517851795180518151825183518451855186518751885189519051915192519351945195519651975198519952005201520252035204520552065207520852095210521152125213521452155216521752185219522052215222522352245225522652275228522952305231523252335234523552365237523852395240524152425243524452455246524752485249525052515252525352545255525652575258525952605261526252635264526552665267526852695270527152725273527452755276527752785279528052815282528352845285528652875288528952905291529252935294529552965297529852995300530153025303530453055306530753085309531053115312531353145315531653175318531953205321532253235324532553265327532853295330533153325333533453355336533753385339534053415342534353445345534653475348534953505351535253535354535553565357535853595360536153625363536453655366536753685369537053715372537353745375537653775378537953805381538253835384538553865387538853895390539153925393539453955396539753985399540054015402540354045405540654075408540954105411541254135414541554165417541854195420542154225423542454255426542754285429543054315432543354345435543654375438543954405441544254435444544554465447544854495450545154525453545454555456545754585459546054615462546354645465546654675468546954705471547254735474547554765477547854795480548154825483548454855486548754885489549054915492549354945495549654975498549955005501550255035504550555065507550855095510551155125513551455155516551755185519552055215522552355245525552655275528552955305531553255335534553555365537553855395540554155425543554455455546554755485549555055515552555355545555555655575558555955605561556255635564556555665567556855695570557155725573557455755576557755785579558055815582558355845585558655875588558955905591559255935594559555965597559855995600560156025603560456055606560756085609561056115612561356145615561656175618561956205621562256235624562556265627562856295630563156325633563456355636563756385639564056415642564356445645564656475648564956505651565256535654565556565657565856595660566156625663566456655666566756685669567056715672567356745675567656775678567956805681568256835684568556865687568856895690569156925693569456955696569756985699570057015702570357045705570657075708570957105711571257135714571557165717571857195720572157225723572457255726572757285729573057315732573357345735573657375738573957405741574257435744574557465747574857495750575157525753575457555756575757585759576057615762576357645765576657675768576957705771577257735774577557765777577857795780578157825783578457855786578757885789579057915792579357945795579657975798579958005801580258035804580558065807580858095810581158125813581458155816581758185819582058215822582358245825582658275828582958305831583258335834583558365837583858395840584158425843584458455846584758485849585058515852585358545855585658575858585958605861586258635864586558665867586858695870587158725873587458755876587758785879588058815882588358845885588658875888588958905891589258935894589558965897589858995900590159025903590459055906590759085909591059115912591359145915591659175918591959205921592259235924592559265927592859295930593159325933593459355936593759385939594059415942594359445945594659475948594959505951595259535954595559565957595859595960596159625963596459655966596759685969597059715972597359745975597659775978597959805981598259835984598559865987598859895990599159925993599459955996599759985999600060016002600360046005600660076008600960106011601260136014601560166017601860196020602160226023602460256026602760286029603060316032603360346035603660376038603960406041604260436044604560466047604860496050605160526053605460556056605760586059606060616062606360646065606660676068606960706071607260736074607560766077607860796080608160826083608460856086608760886089609060916092609360946095609660976098609961006101610261036104610561066107610861096110611161126113611461156116611761186119612061216122612361246125612661276128612961306131613261336134613561366137613861396140614161426143614461456146614761486149615061516152615361546155615661576158615961606161616261636164616561666167616861696170617161726173617461756176617761786179618061816182618361846185618661876188618961906191619261936194619561966197619861996200620162026203620462056206620762086209621062116212621362146215621662176218621962206221622262236224622562266227622862296230623162326233623462356236623762386239624062416242624362446245624662476248624962506251625262536254625562566257625862596260626162626263626462656266626762686269627062716272627362746275627662776278627962806281628262836284628562866287628862896290629162926293629462956296629762986299630063016302630363046305630663076308630963106311631263136314631563166317631863196320632163226323632463256326632763286329633063316332633363346335633663376338633963406341634263436344634563466347634863496350635163526353635463556356635763586359636063616362636363646365636663676368636963706371637263736374637563766377637863796380638163826383638463856386638763886389639063916392639363946395639663976398639964006401640264036404640564066407640864096410641164126413641464156416641764186419642064216422642364246425642664276428642964306431643264336434643564366437643864396440644164426443644464456446644764486449645064516452645364546455645664576458645964606461646264636464646564666467646864696470647164726473647464756476647764786479648064816482648364846485648664876488648964906491649264936494649564966497649864996500650165026503650465056506650765086509651065116512651365146515651665176518651965206521652265236524652565266527652865296530653165326533653465356536653765386539654065416542654365446545654665476548654965506551655265536554655565566557655865596560656165626563656465656566656765686569657065716572657365746575657665776578657965806581658265836584658565866587658865896590659165926593659465956596659765986599660066016602660366046605660666076608660966106611661266136614661566166617661866196620662166226623662466256626662766286629663066316632663366346635663666376638663966406641664266436644664566466647664866496650665166526653665466556656665766586659666066616662666366646665666666676668666966706671667266736674667566766677667866796680668166826683668466856686668766886689669066916692669366946695669666976698669967006701670267036704670567066707670867096710671167126713671467156716671767186719672067216722672367246725672667276728672967306731673267336734673567366737673867396740674167426743674467456746674767486749675067516752675367546755675667576758675967606761676267636764676567666767676867696770677167726773677467756776677767786779678067816782678367846785678667876788678967906791679267936794679567966797679867996800680168026803680468056806680768086809681068116812681368146815681668176818681968206821682268236824682568266827682868296830683168326833683468356836683768386839684068416842684368446845684668476848684968506851685268536854685568566857685868596860686168626863686468656866686768686869687068716872687368746875687668776878687968806881688268836884688568866887688868896890689168926893689468956896689768986899690069016902690369046905690669076908690969106911691269136914691569166917691869196920692169226923692469256926692769286929693069316932693369346935693669376938693969406941694269436944694569466947694869496950695169526953695469556956695769586959696069616962696369646965696669676968696969706971697269736974697569766977697869796980698169826983698469856986698769886989699069916992699369946995699669976998699970007001700270037004700570067007700870097010701170127013701470157016701770187019702070217022702370247025702670277028702970307031703270337034703570367037703870397040704170427043704470457046704770487049705070517052705370547055705670577058705970607061706270637064706570667067706870697070707170727073707470757076707770787079708070817082708370847085708670877088708970907091709270937094709570967097709870997100710171027103710471057106710771087109711071117112711371147115711671177118711971207121712271237124712571267127712871297130713171327133713471357136713771387139714071417142714371447145714671477148714971507151715271537154715571567157715871597160716171627163716471657166716771687169717071717172717371747175717671777178717971807181718271837184718571867187718871897190719171927193719471957196719771987199720072017202720372047205720672077208720972107211721272137214721572167217721872197220722172227223722472257226722772287229723072317232723372347235723672377238723972407241724272437244724572467247724872497250725172527253725472557256725772587259726072617262726372647265726672677268726972707271727272737274727572767277727872797280728172827283728472857286728772887289729072917292729372947295729672977298729973007301730273037304730573067307730873097310731173127313731473157316731773187319732073217322732373247325732673277328732973307331733273337334733573367337733873397340734173427343734473457346734773487349735073517352735373547355735673577358735973607361736273637364736573667367736873697370737173727373737473757376737773787379738073817382738373847385738673877388738973907391739273937394739573967397739873997400740174027403740474057406740774087409741074117412741374147415741674177418741974207421742274237424742574267427742874297430743174327433743474357436743774387439744074417442744374447445744674477448744974507451745274537454745574567457745874597460746174627463746474657466746774687469747074717472747374747475747674777478747974807481748274837484748574867487748874897490749174927493749474957496749774987499750075017502750375047505750675077508750975107511751275137514751575167517751875197520752175227523752475257526752775287529753075317532753375347535753675377538753975407541754275437544754575467547754875497550755175527553755475557556755775587559756075617562756375647565756675677568756975707571757275737574757575767577757875797580758175827583758475857586758775887589759075917592759375947595759675977598759976007601760276037604760576067607760876097610761176127613761476157616761776187619762076217622762376247625762676277628762976307631763276337634763576367637763876397640764176427643764476457646764776487649765076517652765376547655765676577658765976607661766276637664766576667667766876697670767176727673767476757676767776787679768076817682768376847685768676877688768976907691769276937694769576967697769876997700770177027703770477057706770777087709771077117712771377147715771677177718771977207721772277237724772577267727772877297730773177327733773477357736773777387739774077417742774377447745774677477748774977507751775277537754775577567757775877597760776177627763776477657766776777687769777077717772777377747775777677777778777977807781778277837784778577867787778877897790779177927793779477957796779777987799780078017802780378047805780678077808780978107811781278137814781578167817781878197820782178227823782478257826782778287829783078317832783378347835783678377838783978407841784278437844784578467847784878497850785178527853785478557856785778587859786078617862786378647865786678677868786978707871787278737874787578767877787878797880788178827883788478857886788778887889789078917892789378947895789678977898789979007901790279037904790579067907790879097910791179127913791479157916791779187919792079217922792379247925792679277928792979307931793279337934793579367937793879397940794179427943794479457946794779487949795079517952795379547955795679577958795979607961796279637964796579667967796879697970797179727973797479757976797779787979798079817982798379847985798679877988798979907991799279937994799579967997799879998000800180028003800480058006800780088009801080118012801380148015801680178018801980208021802280238024802580268027802880298030803180328033803480358036803780388039804080418042804380448045804680478048804980508051805280538054805580568057805880598060806180628063806480658066806780688069807080718072807380748075807680778078807980808081808280838084808580868087808880898090809180928093809480958096809780988099810081018102810381048105810681078108810981108111811281138114811581168117811881198120812181228123
  1. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACL ==
  2. Sets permissions on an object.
  3. == CMD_USAGE_ACL ==
  4. Usage:
  5. cm ^acl (--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
  6. (-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]
  7. <objectspec>
  8. --^user User name.
  9. --^group Group name.
  10. -^allowed Enables the specified permission or permissions. Use a
  11. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  12. to display all the available permissions.)
  13. -^denied Denies the specified permission or permission. Use a
  14. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  15. to display all the available permissions.)
  16. -^overrideallowed Overrides the allowed permission or permissions. Use a
  17. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  18. to display all the available permissions.)
  19. -^overridedenied Overrides the denied permission or permissions. Use a
  20. comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
  21. to display all the available permissions.)
  22. objectspec The object whose permissions will be set.
  23. The valid objects for this command are:
  24. repserver, repository, branch, changeset, label, item,
  25. and attribute.
  26. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  27. Special usage for secured paths:
  28. cm ^acl [(--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
  29. (-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]]
  30. [--^delete] [--^branches=[+ | -]<branch>[,...]]
  31. <spec>
  32. --^delete Removes a secured path.
  33. See Remarks for more info.
  34. --^branches Sets the secured path permissions to a group of branches.
  35. Use a comma to separate branches.
  36. Optionally, each branch can be preceded by the + or -
  37. sign to specify whether a branch must be added or deleted
  38. to the list when editing.
  39. See Remarks for more info.
  40. spec The secured path where to set the permissions.
  41. == CMD_HELP_ACL ==
  42. Configuring permissions requires understanding how Plastic SCM security works.
  43. Check the Security Guide to learn how permissions work:
  44. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/securityguide
  45. Remarks:
  46. This command sets permissions for a user or group on the specified objects,
  47. repositories, branches, labels and/or server paths.
  48. Object specs:
  49. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify objects.)
  50. The '^acl' command uses a special type of spec: secured paths.
  51. - Secured paths specs:
  52. ^path:server_path[#tag]
  53. Examples: ^path:/src/foo.c
  54. ^path:/doc/pdf
  55. ^path:/doc/pdf#documents
  56. Permission action:
  57. Use -^allowed and -^denied to specify what permissions to set.
  58. Use -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied arguments to specify what
  59. permissions to override.
  60. Each action requires a permission list separated by commas.
  61. Permission names:
  62. Each permission name is preceded by + or - symbol.
  63. The + symbol sets the permission and the - symbol clears it.
  64. To see the permissions of an object, use the 'cm ^showacl' command.
  65. Overridden permissions:
  66. Overriding a permission using -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied
  67. allows you to bypass inheritance.
  68. It is helpful to bypass permissions set at the repository or server
  69. level.
  70. Example:
  71. cm ^acl --^user=vio -^allowed=+^ci -^overrideallowed=+^ci ^br:qa@test
  72. (Allows user 'vio' to checkin on the branch 'qa' on repo 'test'
  73. even if she has the permission denied at the repo level.)
  74. Server path permissions (a.k.a. secured paths):
  75. - It is possible to specify permissions for a given server path.
  76. - These permissions are checked during the checkin operation.
  77. - These permissions can also be checked during the update operation,
  78. and can be used as a way to prevent certain directories and files to
  79. be downloaded to the workspace.
  80. - For every item to checkin, the server tries to match the item path
  81. with a secured path. If it matches, the checkin operation checks
  82. whether the item has permissions to be checked in.
  83. The permissions that can be defined for a secured path are the
  84. following:
  85. '^ci', '^change', '^add', '^move', '^rm', '^read'
  86. If the permissions check is not successful for any of the involved
  87. items, the checkin operation will be rolled back.
  88. To set secured path permissions to a group of branches, use the
  89. --^branches option.
  90. Example:
  91. cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^ci ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=main,main/rel0
  92. To edit the ACL associated to the secured path, the tag is useful.
  93. Example:
  94. cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^rm ^path:/src#rule0
  95. (Without the tag, the list of branches would need to be specified
  96. again.)
  97. The list of branches of the secured path can be edited.
  98. Example:
  99. cm ^acl ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=-main,+main/rel1
  100. (Removes 'main' from the list and adds 'main/rel1'.)
  101. To remove a secured path, use the --^delete argument.
  102. Example:
  103. cm ^acl --^user=jo --^delete ^path:/src#rule0
  104. Inheritance:
  105. Inheritance is an option that comes from the days of Plastic SCM 3.0.
  106. It is advanced, but almost deprecated.
  107. It lets an object inherit its permissions from any other object,
  108. overriding the default inheritance relationships.
  109. Use the option -^cut to cut the inheritance chain.
  110. Use the option -^cutncpy to cut and copy the current inherited
  111. permissions. (This is inspired on the Windows filesystem permissions
  112. where you can cut inheritance but retain the actual permissions.)
  113. The -^inherit option allows the user to inherit from an object spec.
  114. Example: '-^inherit=object_spec'
  115. Examples:
  116. cm ^acl --^user=danipen -^denied=+^ci ^rep:core
  117. (Denies checkin for user 'danipen' on repo 'core'.)
  118. cm ^acl --^group=developers -^allowed=+^view,-^read -^denied=+^chgperm ^br:main
  119. (The command grants view permission, clears read permission,
  120. and denies chgperm permission to 'developers' group in 'main' branch.)
  121. Secured path examples:
  122. cm ^acl --^group=devs -^denied=+^ci ^path:/server#rel --^branches=main,main/2.0
  123. (The command denies the checkin permission to 'devs' group for any path
  124. that matches '/server' in the branches 'main' and 'main/2.0'. The tag '#rel'
  125. is created to be able to refer to it later.)
  126. cm ^acl ^path:/server#rel --^branches=-/main,+/main/Rel2.1
  127. (Updates the secured path '/server', whose tag is 'rel', removing the
  128. 'main' branch and adding the branch 'main/Rel2.1' to the branch
  129. group the secured path applies to. Considering the previous example,
  130. now the branches list will contain 'main/Rel2.1' and 'main/2.0'.)
  131. cm ^acl --^user=vsanchezm -^allowed=-^read -^overrideallowed=+^read ^path:/doc
  132. (Removes '^read' permission to 'vsanchezm' overriding it in '/doc' path.)
  133. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACTIVATEUSER ==
  134. Activates a licensed user.
  135. == CMD_USAGE_ACTIVATEUSER ==
  136. Usage:
  137. cm ^activateuser | ^au <user-name>[ ...] [--^server=<rep-server-spec>]
  138. user-name The user name or user names to activate. Use double quotes (" ")
  139. to specify user names containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  140. separate user names.
  141. Options:
  142. --^server=<rep-server-spec> Activates the user in the specified server.
  143. If no server is specified, executes the command
  144. in the default server in the client.conf file.
  145. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  146. repserver specs.)
  147. == CMD_HELP_ACTIVATEUSER ==
  148. Remarks:
  149. To activate a user, it must have been previously deactivated.
  150. By default, a user is activated the first time they perform a write
  151. operation in Plastic SCM. The user is automatically activated only if
  152. the maximum number of users has not been exceeded.
  153. See the 'cm ^help ^deactivateuser' command for more information about
  154. deactivating Plastic SCM users.
  155. Examples:
  156. cm ^activateuser john
  157. cm ^activateuser david "mary collins"
  158. cm ^au peter --^server=localhost:8087
  159. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADD ==
  160. Adds an item to version control.
  161. == CMD_USAGE_ADD ==
  162. Usage:
  163. cm ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
  164. [--^skipcontentcheck] [--^coparent] [--^filetypes=<file>] [--^noinfo]
  165. [--^format=<str-format>] [--^errorformat=<str-format>]
  166. <item-path>[ ...]
  167. item-path The item or items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  168. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate items.
  169. Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
  170. Options:
  171. -^R -^r --^recursive Adds items recursively.
  172. --^silent Does not show any output.
  173. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
  174. continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
  175. added, its content is not added.
  176. --^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
  177. text or binary, it will be set as binary instead of
  178. checking the content to detect the type. This is done
  179. to increase performance on huge checkins.
  180. --^coparent Runs a checkout of the parent of the item being added.
  181. --^filetypes The filetypes file to use. Check the following link for
  182. more information:
  183. http://blog.plasticscm.com/2008/03/custom-file-types.html
  184. --^noinfo Doesn't print progress information.
  185. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. Check
  186. the examples for more information.
  187. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
  188. format. Check the examples for more information.
  189. == CMD_HELP_ADD ==
  190. Remarks:
  191. Requirements to add items:
  192. - The parent directory of the item to add must have been previously added.
  193. Reading input from stdin:
  194. The '^add' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single dash
  195. "-".
  196. Example: cm ^add -
  197. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  198. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to add.
  199. Example:
  200. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^add -
  201. (In Windows, adds all .c files in the workspace.)
  202. Examples:
  203. cm ^add file1.txt file2.txt
  204. (Adds 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' items.)
  205. cm ^add c:\workspace\file.txt
  206. (Adds 'file.txt' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
  207. cm ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
  208. (Recursively adds 'src'.)
  209. cm ^add -^R *
  210. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
  211. cm ^add -^R * --^filetypes=filetypes.conf
  212. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, using
  213. 'filetypes.conf' to assign a type to each file based on its extension,
  214. instead of checking its content.)
  215. cm ^add --^coparent c:\workspace\dir\file.txt
  216. (Adds 'file.txt' to source control, and performs a checkout of 'dir'.)
  217. cm ^add -^R * --^format="ADD {0}" --^errorformat="ERR {0}"
  218. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, printing
  219. '^ADD <item>' for successfully added files, and '^ERR <item>' for items that
  220. could not be added.)
  221. == CMD_USAGE_ADDIGNOREPATTERN ==
  222. Usage:
  223. cm ^addignorepattern <pattern>[ ...]
  224. [--^workspace=<wkpath> | --^allworkspaces] [--^remove]
  225. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN ==
  226. Executes administrative commands on the server.
  227. == CMD_USAGE_ADMIN ==
  228. Usage:
  229. cm ^admin <command> [options]
  230. Available commands:
  231. ^readonly
  232. To get more information about each command run:
  233. cm ^admin <command> --^usage
  234. cm ^admin <command> --^help
  235. == CMD_HELP_ADMIN ==
  236. Remarks:
  237. Only the server administrator can execute administrative commands.
  238. Examples:
  239. cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter
  240. cm ^admin ^readonly ^status
  241. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN_READONLY ==
  242. Enables/disables the server readonly mode.
  243. == CMD_USAGE_ADMIN_READONLY ==
  244. Usage:
  245. cm ^admin ^readonly (^enter | ^leave | ^status) [<server>]
  246. Actions:
  247. ^enter The server enters read-only mode. Write operations will be rejected.
  248. ^leave The server leaves read-only mode.
  249. ^status Shows the server read-only mode status.
  250. Options:
  251. server Executes the command in the specified server (server:port). (Use
  252. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server specs.)
  253. If no server is specified, the command works with the server of the
  254. current workspace.
  255. If the current path is not in a workspace, the command works with
  256. the default server defined in the client.conf config file.
  257. == CMD_HELP_ADMIN_READONLY ==
  258. Remarks:
  259. Only the server administrator can enter the server readonly mode.
  260. Examples:
  261. cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter diana:8086
  262. cm ^admin ^readonly ^leave
  263. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ANNOTATE ==
  264. Shows the changeset where each line of a file was last modified and its author.
  265. == CMD_USAGE_ANNOTATE ==
  266. Usage:
  267. cm ^annotate | ^blame <spec>[ ...]
  268. [--^format=<str_format>]
  269. [--^ignore=(^eol | ^whitespaces | ^"eol&whitespaces" | ^none)]
  270. [--^dateformat=<str_date_format>]
  271. [--^encoding=<name>]
  272. [--^stats]
  273. [--^repository=<repspec>]
  274. spec The spec of the file to annotate.
  275. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  276. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
  277. Options:
  278. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  279. Remarks for more info.
  280. --^ignore Sets the specified comparison method.
  281. See Remarks for more info.
  282. --^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
  283. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  284. See the MSDN documentation at
  285. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  286. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  287. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  288. --^stats Shows statistics information.
  289. --^repository Specifies a repository spec used to calculate
  290. the annotations. By default, this command uses the
  291. repository where the loaded revision repository in the
  292. workspace is stored. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  293. more about repspecs.)
  294. == CMD_HELP_ANNOTATE ==
  295. Remarks:
  296. Binary files can't be annotated.
  297. --^ignore options:
  298. ^none Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
  299. ^eol Ignores end of line differences.
  300. ^whitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
  301. ^"eol&whitespaces" Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
  302. --^format options:
  303. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  304. {^owner} User who changed the line the last time.
  305. {^rev} Source revision specification of the line.
  306. {^content} Line content.
  307. {^date} Date when the line was checked in.
  308. {^comment} Comment of the source revision of the line.
  309. {^changeset} Changeset of the source revision of the line.
  310. {^line} Line number of the file.
  311. {^id} Item id.
  312. {^parentid} Parent id of the item.
  313. {^rep} Repository of the item.
  314. {^branch} Branch of the source revision of the line.
  315. {^ismergerev} Whether the revision of the line was created in a merge.
  316. --^dateformat:
  317. To specify the output format in which dates will be printed.
  318. See the supported formats specified at:
  319. https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/standard/base-types/custom-date-and-time-format-strings
  320. --^repository:
  321. To retrieve data from a remote repository. Useful for distributed
  322. scenarios.
  323. Examples:
  324. cm ^blame c:\workspace\src --^ignore=^"eol&whitespaces" --^encoding=utf-8
  325. cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^ignore=^eol
  326. cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner} {^date, 10} {^content}"
  327. (Writes the owner field, then a blank, then the date field (aligned to
  328. right), then a blank, and the content.)
  329. cm ^blame c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner, -7} {^comment} {^date}" \
  330. --^dateformat=yyyyMMdd
  331. (Writes the owner field in 7 spaces (aligned to the left) followed by
  332. a blank, then the comment, followed by another blank, and ending with the
  333. formatted date (for example, 20170329).)
  334. cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^repository=centralRep@myserver:8084
  335. cm ^blame ^serverpath:/src/client/checkin/Checkin.cs#^cs:73666
  336. (Annotates the file starting in changeset 73666 using a server path.)
  337. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_APPLY_LOCAL ==
  338. Checks for local changes (locally moved, locally deleted, and locally changed)
  339. and applies them, so that Plastic SCM starts tracking those changes.
  340. == CMD_USAGE_APPLY_LOCAL ==
  341. Usage:
  342. cm ^applylocal | ^al [--^dependencies] [<item_path>[ ...]]
  343. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  344. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  345. Options:
  346. --^dependencies Adds local change dependencies into the items to
  347. apply.
  348. item_path Items to be applied. Use a whitespace to separate
  349. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  350. containing spaces.
  351. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  352. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  353. the lines should start.
  354. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  355. the lines should end.
  356. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  357. the fields should be separated.
  358. == CMD_HELP_APPLY_LOCAL ==
  359. Remarks:
  360. If --^dependencies and <item_path> are not specified, the operation involves
  361. all the local changes in the workspace.
  362. It is always applied recursively from the given path.
  363. Examples:
  364. cm ^applylocal foo.c bar.c
  365. cm ^applylocal .
  366. (Applies all local changes in the current directory.)
  367. cm ^applylocal
  368. (Applies all local changes in the workspace.)
  369. cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable
  370. (Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
  371. simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
  372. cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" \
  373. --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
  374. (Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
  375. simplified, easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines and
  376. separating the fields with the specified strings.)
  377. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ARCHIVE ==
  378. Archives data in external storage.
  379. == CMD_USAGE_ARCHIVE ==
  380. Usage:
  381. cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] [-^c | --^comment=<str_comment>]
  382. [--^file=<base_file>]
  383. (Extracts data from the repository and stores it on external storage.)
  384. cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] --^restore
  385. (Restores previously archived revisions back into the repository.)
  386. revspec One or more revision specs. Can be read from the STDIN
  387. with the "-" modifier. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  388. learn more about revspecs.)
  389. --^restore Restores previously archived data from generated archive
  390. files.
  391. Options:
  392. -^c | --^comment Sets a comment in the archive storage files to create.
  393. --^file Name prefix and (optional) path for the new archive
  394. data files.
  395. == CMD_HELP_ARCHIVE ==
  396. Remarks:
  397. This command extracts data from the repository database and store it on
  398. external storage, saving database space.
  399. The command can also restore previously archived revisions back into the
  400. repository database (--^restore).
  401. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify a revspec.
  402. The user running this command must be the Plastic SCM server administrator
  403. (repository server owner) to be allowed to complete the operation.
  404. Every data segment from the specified revisions will be stored in a
  405. different file, with a name starting with the value defined by the --^file
  406. argument. This argument can contain either a full path value including a
  407. prefix for future archive files or just this prefix value.
  408. Once archived, the data from the specified revisions will be accessible in
  409. two ways:
  410. - From the client: The client will detect if the data was archived and it
  411. will prompt the user to enter the location of the files.
  412. Users can configure the external data location by creating a file named
  413. externaldata.conf (at the standard configuration files locations, using
  414. the same rules that apply for the client.conf file) containing the paths
  415. where archived data have been located.
  416. - From the server: This way users won't have to know whether the data was
  417. archived or not, since requests will be transparently resolved by the
  418. server. To do so, the administrator will create a file called
  419. externaldata.conf in the server directory and will fill it with the
  420. paths where the archived volumes are.
  421. To unarchive (restore) a revision (or set of revisions), the archived
  422. files must be accessible from the client. Hence, it is not possible to
  423. unarchive data being resolved by the server (method 2) because the client
  424. will not be able to identify it as archived. If method 2 is used, to
  425. unarchive successfully, the administrator will have to edit the
  426. externaldata.conf server file first to remove access to the archived
  427. files which have to be unarchived.
  428. Set PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor to type the
  429. comment.
  430. Examples:
  431. cm ^archive bigfile.zip#^br:/main
  432. (Archives the last revision of 'bigfile.zip' in branch 'main'.)
  433. cm ^archive ^rev:myfile.pdf#^cs:2 -^c="big pdf file" --^file=c:\arch_files\arch
  434. (Archives the revision with changeset 2 of myfile.pdf in 'c:\archived_files'
  435. folder. The archived file name will start with 'arch' (for example, arch_11_56).)
  436. cm ^find "^revs ^where ^size > 26214400" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}" \
  437. --^nototal | cm ^archive --^comment="volume00" --^file="volume00" -
  438. (Archives all the files bigger than 25Mb on files starting with name
  439. 'volume00'.)
  440. cm ^find "^revs ^where ^size > 26214400 ^and ^archived='true'" \
  441. --^format="{^item}#{^branch}" --^nototal | cm ^archive --^restore
  442. (Restores all the archived files bigger than 25Mb.)
  443. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE ==
  444. Allows the user to manage attributes.
  445. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE ==
  446. Usage:
  447. cm ^attribute | ^att <command> [options]
  448. Commands:
  449. ^create | ^mk
  450. ^delete | ^rm
  451. ^set
  452. ^unset
  453. ^rename
  454. ^edit
  455. To get more information about each command run:
  456. cm ^attribute <command> --^usage
  457. cm ^attribute <command> --^help
  458. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE ==
  459. Examples:
  460. cm ^attribute ^create status
  461. cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
  462. cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
  463. cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
  464. cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status "buildStatus"
  465. cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of the task in the CI pipeline"
  466. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGELIST ==
  467. Groups pending changes in changelists.
  468. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGELIST ==
  469. Usage:
  470. a) Management of changelists objects:
  471. cm ^changelist | ^clist [--^symlink]
  472. (Displays all changelists.)
  473. cm ^changelist | ^clist ^add <clist_name>
  474. [<clist_desc>] [--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
  475. (Creates a changelist.)
  476. cm ^changelist | ^clist ^rm <clist_name> [--^symlink]
  477. (Removes the selected changelist. If this changelist contains pending
  478. changes, then these will be moved to the ^default changelist.)
  479. cm ^changelist | ^clist ^edit <clist_name> [<action_name> <action_value>]
  480. [--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
  481. (Edits the selected changelist.)
  482. b) Management of contents of a given changelist:
  483. cm ^changelist | ^clist <clist_name> (^add | ^rm) <path_name>[ ...]
  484. [--^symlink]
  485. (Adds the selected changelist by adding ('^add') or removing ('^rm') the
  486. change(s) that match with the given path_name(s). Use a whitespace to
  487. separate path_names. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
  488. spaces. The status of the paths must be '^Added' or '^Checked-out'.)
  489. Options:
  490. clist_name The name of the changelist.
  491. clist_desc The description of the changelist.
  492. action_name Choose between '^rename' or '^description' to edit the
  493. changelist.
  494. action_value Applies the new name or new description when editing
  495. the changelist.
  496. --^persistent The changelist will remain in the workspace even if its
  497. contents are checked-in or reverted.
  498. --^notpersistent (Default) The changelist will not remain in the
  499. workspace even if its contents are checked-in or
  500. reverted.
  501. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  502. target.
  503. == CMD_HELP_CHANGELIST ==
  504. Remarks:
  505. The '^changelist' command handles both the workspace pending changelists and
  506. the changes contained in a changelist.
  507. Examples:
  508. cm ^changelist
  509. (Shows the current workspace changelists.)
  510. cm ^changelist ^add config_changes "dotConf files" --^persistent
  511. (Creates a new changelist named 'config_changes' and description 'dotConf
  512. files' which will remain persistent in the current workspace once the
  513. pending changelist is either checked-in or reverted.)
  514. cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes ^rename config_files --^notpersistent
  515. (Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' and renames it to
  516. 'config_files'. Also, it turns the changelist into "not persistent".)
  517. cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes --^notpersistent
  518. (Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' and turns it into "not persistent".)
  519. cm ^changelist ^rm config_files
  520. (Removes the pending changelist 'config_files' from the current workspace.)
  521. cm ^changelist config_files ^add foo.conf
  522. (Adds the file 'foo.conf' to the 'config_files' changelist.)
  523. cm ^changelist config_files ^rm foo.conf readme.txt
  524. (Removes the files 'foo.conf' and 'readme.txt' from the 'config_files'
  525. changelist and moves the files to the system default changelist.)
  526. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET ==
  527. Executes advanced operations on changesets.
  528. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET ==
  529. Usage:
  530. cm ^changeset <command> [options]
  531. Commands:
  532. ^move | ^mv
  533. ^delete | ^rm
  534. ^editcomment | ^edit
  535. To get more information about each command run:
  536. cm ^changeset <command> --^usage
  537. cm ^changeset <command> --^help
  538. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET ==
  539. Examples:
  540. cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
  541. cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:2b55f8aa-0b29-410f-b99c-60e573a309ca@devData
  542. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_EDIT_COMMENT ==
  543. Modifies the comment of a changeset.
  544. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_EDIT_COMMENT ==
  545. Usage:
  546. cm ^changeset ^editcomment | ^edit <csetspec> <new_comment>
  547. Options:
  548. csetspec The target changeset whose comment will be edited.
  549. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  550. specs.)
  551. new_comment The new comment that will be added to the targeted
  552. changeset.
  553. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_EDIT_COMMENT ==
  554. Remarks:
  555. - The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
  556. Examples:
  557. cm ^changeset ^editcomment ^cs:15@myrepo "I forgot to add the checkin details"
  558. cm ^changeset ^edit ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a \
  559. "This comment text will replace the previous one."
  560. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
  561. Moves a changeset and all its descendants to a different branch.
  562. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
  563. Usage:
  564. cm ^changeset ^move | ^mv <csetspec> <branchspec>
  565. Options:
  566. csetspec First changeset to be moved to a different branch. All
  567. descendant changesets in the same branch will be
  568. targeted by the command as well.
  569. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  570. specs.)
  571. branchspec The target branch where the targeted changesets are
  572. stored. It needs to be empty or non-existing; if the
  573. destination branch doesn't exist, it will be created by
  574. the command.
  575. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
  576. specs.)
  577. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
  578. Remarks:
  579. - The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
  580. - The destination branch must be either empty or non-existing.
  581. - If the destination branch doesn't exist, it will created.
  582. - Merge links will be kept unchanged, since branches don't affect them.
  583. Examples:
  584. cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
  585. cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a ^br:/hotfix/TL-352
  586. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
  587. Deletes a changeset from the repository.
  588. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
  589. Usage:
  590. cm ^changeset ^delete | ^rm <csetspec>
  591. Options:
  592. csetspec The target changeset to be removed. It must fulfill
  593. some specific conditions. See Remarks for more info.
  594. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  595. specs.)
  596. == CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
  597. Remarks:
  598. - The target changeset must be the last in its branch.
  599. - The target changeset cannot be the parent of any other changeset.
  600. - The target changeset cannot be neither the source of a merge link nor
  601. part of an interval merge as source.
  602. - No label must be applied to the target changeset.
  603. - The target changeset must not be the root changeset ('^cs:0')
  604. Examples:
  605. cm ^changeset ^rm ^cs:4525@myrepo@myserver
  606. cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a
  607. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
  608. Changes the user password (UP).
  609. == CMD_USAGE_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
  610. Usage:
  611. cm ^changepassword | ^passwd
  612. == CMD_HELP_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
  613. Remarks:
  614. This command is only available when the security configuration is UP
  615. (user/password). See the Administration guide for more information.
  616. The old and new passwords are required.
  617. Examples:
  618. cm ^passwd
  619. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKCONNECTION ==
  620. Checks the connection to the server.
  621. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKCONNECTION ==
  622. Usage:
  623. cm ^checkconnection | ^cc
  624. == CMD_HELP_CHECKCONNECTION ==
  625. Remarks:
  626. - This command returns a message indicating whether there is a valid
  627. connection to the configured Plastic SCM server.
  628. - The command checks whether the configured user is valid or not. It also
  629. checks the version compatibility with the server.
  630. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKDB ==
  631. Checks the repositories integrity.
  632. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKDB ==
  633. Usage:
  634. cm ^checkdatabase | ^chkdb [<repserverspec> | <repspec>]
  635. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver and rep specs.
  636. == CMD_HELP_CHECKDB ==
  637. Remarks:
  638. - If neither repserverspec nor repspec are specified, the check will be
  639. performed in the server specified in the client.conf file.
  640. Examples:
  641. cm ^checkdatabase ^repserver:localhost:8084
  642. cm ^chkdb ^rep:default@localhost:8084
  643. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKIN ==
  644. Stores changes in the repository.
  645. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKIN ==
  646. Usage:
  647. cm ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
  648. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  649. [--^all|-^a] [--^applychanged] [--^private] [--^update] [--^symlink]
  650. [--^noshowchangeset]
  651. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  652. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  653. Options:
  654. item_path Items to be checked-in. Use double quotes (" ") to
  655. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  656. separate item paths.
  657. Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
  658. -^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset created
  659. in the checkin operation.
  660. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
  661. changeset created in the checkin operation.
  662. --^all | -^a The items changed, moved and deleted locally on the
  663. given paths are also included.
  664. --^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
  665. detected in the workspace along with the checked out
  666. items.
  667. --^private Private items detected in the workspace are also
  668. included.
  669. --^update Processes the update-merge automatically if it
  670. eventually happens.
  671. --^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not
  672. to the target.
  673. --^noshowchangeset Doesn't print the result changeset.
  674. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  675. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  676. the lines should start.
  677. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  678. the lines should end.
  679. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  680. the fields should be separated.
  681. == CMD_HELP_CHECKIN ==
  682. Remarks:
  683. - If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin involves all the
  684. pending changes in the workspace.
  685. - The checkin operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
  686. - To checkin an item:
  687. - The item must be under source code control.
  688. - If the item is private (not under source code control), the --^private
  689. flag is necessary in order to checkin it.
  690. - The item must be checked out.
  691. - If the item is changed but not checked out, the --^applychanged flag
  692. is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
  693. wildcards ('*').
  694. Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
  695. checked in.
  696. Set PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor to type the
  697. comment.
  698. Reading input from stdin:
  699. The '^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
  700. dash "-".
  701. Example: cm ^checkin -
  702. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  703. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
  704. Example:
  705. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkin --^all -
  706. (In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
  707. Examples:
  708. cm ^checkin file1.txt file2.txt
  709. (Checkins the 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' checked-out files.)
  710. cm ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
  711. (Checkins the current directory and sets the comment in the
  712. 'mycomment.txt' file.)
  713. cm ^checkin link --^symlink
  714. (Checkins the 'link' file and not the target; available on UNIX
  715. environments.)
  716. cm ^ci file1.txt -^c="my comment"
  717. (Checkins 'file1.txt' and includes a comment.)
  718. cm ^status --^short --^compact --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
  719. (Lists the paths in the changelist named 'pending_to_review' and redirects
  720. this list to the input of the checkin command.)
  721. cm ^ci . --^machinereadable
  722. (Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
  723. easier-to-parse format.)
  724. cm ^ci . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
  725. (Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
  726. easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
  727. separating the fields with the specified strings.)
  728. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKOUT ==
  729. Marks files as ready to modify.
  730. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKOUT ==
  731. Usage:
  732. cm ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  733. [--^format=<str_format>]
  734. [--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
  735. [--^silent] [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
  736. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  737. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  738. Options:
  739. item_path Items to be checked-out. Use double quotes (" ") to
  740. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  741. separate item paths.
  742. Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
  743. -^R Checks out files recursively.
  744. --^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
  745. format. Check the examples for more information.
  746. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
  747. format. Check the examples for more information.
  748. --^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
  749. format. Check the examples for more information.
  750. --^silent Does not show any output at all.
  751. --^symlink Applies the checkout operation to the symlink and not
  752. to the target.
  753. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
  754. cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
  755. continue without it.
  756. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  757. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  758. the lines should start.
  759. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  760. the lines should end.
  761. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
  762. the fields should be separated.
  763. == CMD_HELP_CHECKOUT ==
  764. Remarks:
  765. To checkout an item:
  766. - The item must be under source code control.
  767. - The item must be checked in.
  768. If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
  769. a checkout on a path happens, Plastic checks if it meets any of the rules
  770. and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
  771. simultaneously checkout.
  772. You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
  773. See the Administrator Guide for more information:
  774. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
  775. The format string replaces the placeholder '{0}' with the path of the item
  776. being checked out. Check the examples to see how to use it.
  777. Reading input from stdin:
  778. The '^checkout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
  779. dash "-".
  780. Example: cm ^checkout -
  781. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  782. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkout.
  783. Example:
  784. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkout -
  785. (In Windows, checkouts all .c files in the workspace.)
  786. Examples:
  787. cm ^checkout file1.txt file2.txt
  788. (Checkouts 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' files.)
  789. cm ^co *.txt
  790. (Checkouts all txt files.)
  791. cm ^checkout .
  792. (Checkouts current directory.)
  793. cm ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
  794. (Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
  795. cm ^co file.txt --^format="Checking out item {0}"
  796. --^errorformat="Error checking out item {0}" /
  797. --^resultformat="Item {0} checked out"
  798. (Checkouts 'file.txt' using the specified formatting strings
  799. to show the progress, the result, and the errors of the operation.)
  800. cm ^checkout link --^symlink
  801. (Checkouts the 'link' file and not to the target; available on UNIX
  802. environments.)
  803. cm ^checkout . -^R --^ignorefailed
  804. (Recursively checkouts the current folder, ignoring those files that can
  805. not be checked out.)
  806. cm ^co . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
  807. (Checkouts the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
  808. easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified strings.)
  809. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
  810. Checks the syntax of a selector.
  811. == CMD_USAGE_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
  812. Usage:
  813. cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css --^file=<selector_file>
  814. (Checks the selector file syntax.)
  815. ^cat <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
  816. (Unix. Checks selector file from standard input.)
  817. ^type <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
  818. (Windows. Checks selector file from standard input.)
  819. --^file The file to read a selector from.
  820. == CMD_HELP_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
  821. Remarks:
  822. This command reads a selector on either a file or standard input, and
  823. checks it for valid syntax. If the syntax check fails, the reason is
  824. printed on standard output.
  825. Examples:
  826. cm ^checkselectorsyntax --^file=myselector.txt
  827. (Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' file.)
  828. ^cat myselector.txt | cm ^checkselectorsyntax
  829. (Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' from standard input.)
  830. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHGREVTYPE ==
  831. Changes an item revision type (binary or text).
  832. == CMD_USAGE_CHGREVTYPE ==
  833. Usage:
  834. cm ^changerevisiontype | ^chgrevtype | ^crt <item_path>[ ...] --^type=(^bin | ^txt)
  835. item_path Items to change revision type. Use double quotes (" ")
  836. to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  837. separate item paths.
  838. --^type Target revisions type. Choose '^bin' or '^txt'.
  839. == CMD_HELP_CHGREVTYPE ==
  840. Remarks:
  841. This command can only be applied to files, not directories.
  842. The specified type must be a system supported one: '^bin' or '^txt' (binary
  843. or text).
  844. Examples:
  845. cm ^changerevisiontype c:\workspace\file.txt --^type=^txt
  846. (Changes 'file.txt' revision type to text.)
  847. cm ^chgrevtype comp.zip "image file.jpg" --^type=^bin
  848. (Changes 'comp.zip' and "image file.jpg" revision type to binary.)
  849. cm ^crt *.* --^type=^txt
  850. (Changes revision type of all files to text.)
  851. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
  852. Edits a trigger.
  853. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
  854. Usage:
  855. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^edit <subtype_type> <position_number>
  856. [--^position=<new_position>]
  857. [--^name=<new_name>] [--^script=<script_path>]
  858. [--^filter=<str_filter>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  859. subtype_type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  860. Type 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
  861. types.
  862. position_number Position occupied by the trigger to be modified.
  863. Options:
  864. --^position New position of the specified trigger.
  865. This position must not be in use by another
  866. trigger of the same type.
  867. --^name New name of the specified trigger.
  868. --^script New execution path of the specified trigger script.
  869. If the script starts with "^webtrigger ", it will be
  870. considered as a web trigger. See Remarks for more
  871. further details.
  872. --^filter Checks only items that match the specified filter.
  873. --^server Modifies the trigger on the specified server.
  874. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  875. one configured on the client.
  876. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
  877. specs.)
  878. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
  879. Remarks:
  880. Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
  881. as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
  882. against the specified URI, where the request body contains a JSON
  883. dictionary with the trigger environment variables, and a fixed INPUT key
  884. pointing to an array of strings.
  885. Examples:
  886. cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-setselector 6 --^name="Backup2 manager" --^script="/new/path/al/script"
  887. cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
  888. cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-add 2 --^script="^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
  889. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CODEREVIEW ==
  890. Creates, edits, or deletes code reviews.
  891. == CMD_USAGE_CODEREVIEW ==
  892. Usage:
  893. cm ^codereview <spec> <title> [--^status=<status_name>]
  894. [--^assignee=<user_name>] [--^format=<str_format>]
  895. [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
  896. (Creates a code review.)
  897. cm ^codereview -^e <id> [--^status=<status_name>] [--^assignee=<user_name>]
  898. [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
  899. (Edits a code review.)
  900. cm ^codereview -^d <id> [ ...] [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
  901. (Deletes one or more code reviews.)
  902. spec It can be either a changeset spec or a branch spec. It
  903. will be the target of the new code review. (Use
  904. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset or
  905. branch specs.)
  906. title A text string to be used as title of the new
  907. code review.
  908. id The code review identification number. A GUID can be
  909. used as well.
  910. Options:
  911. -^e Edits the parameters of an existing code review.
  912. -^d Deletes one or more existing code reviews. Use a
  913. whitespace to separate the code reviews IDs.
  914. --^status Sets the new status of a code review. See Remarks
  915. for additional information.
  916. --^assignee Sets the new assignee of a code review.
  917. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  918. Remarks for additional information.
  919. --^repository Sets the repository to be used as default. (Use
  920. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  921. specs.)
  922. == CMD_HELP_CODEREVIEW ==
  923. Remarks:
  924. This command allows users to manage code reviews: create, edit, and delete
  925. code reviews for changesets or branches.
  926. To create a new code review, a changeset/branch spec and a title are
  927. required. The initial status and assignee can be set, too. An ID (or GUID
  928. if requested) will be returned as a result.
  929. To edit or delete an existing code review, the target code review ID
  930. (or GUID) is required. No messages are displayed if there are no errors.
  931. The status parameter can only be one of the following: ^"Under review"
  932. (default), ^"Reviewed", or ^"Rework required".
  933. The repository parameter is available to set the default working
  934. repository. This is useful when the user wants to manage reviews on
  935. a server different than the one associated to the current workspace, or
  936. when there is no current workspace at all.
  937. Output format customization:
  938. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  939. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  940. {0} id
  941. {1} guid
  942. Please note that the '--^format' parameter only takes effect when creating
  943. a new code review.
  944. Examples:
  945. cm ^codereview ^cs:1856@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" --^assignee=dummy
  946. cm ^codereview ^br:/main/task001@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" \
  947. --^status=^"Rework required" --^assignee=newbie --^format="{^id} -> {^guid}"
  948. cm ^codereview 1367 -^e --^assignee=new_assignee
  949. cm ^codereview -^e 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 --^status=Reviewed
  950. cm ^codereview -^d 1367 --^repository=myremoterepo@myremoteserver:18084
  951. cm ^codereview 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 -^d
  952. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CRYPT ==
  953. Encrypts a password.
  954. == CMD_USAGE_CRYPT ==
  955. Usage:
  956. cm ^crypt <mypassword>
  957. mypassword Password to be encrypted.
  958. == CMD_HELP_CRYPT ==
  959. Remarks:
  960. This command encrypts a given password passed as argument.
  961. It is designed to encrypt passwords in configuration files and increase
  962. safety.
  963. Examples:
  964. cm ^crypt dbconfpassword -> ENCRYPTED: encrypteddbconfpassword
  965. (Encrypts the password in the database configuration file: 'db.conf'.)
  966. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
  967. Deactivates a licensed user.
  968. == CMD_USAGE_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
  969. Usage:
  970. cm ^deactivateuser | ^du <usr_name>[ ...] [--^server=<name:port>]
  971. [--^nosolveuser]
  972. usr_name The user name(s) to deactivate. Use a whitespace to
  973. separate user names.
  974. If SID, then '--^nosolveuser' is required.
  975. Options:
  976. --^server Deactivates the user on the specified server.
  977. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  978. one configured on the client.
  979. --^nosolveuser With this option, the command will not check whether
  980. the user name exists on the authentication system. The
  981. <usr_name> must be a user SID.
  982. == CMD_HELP_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
  983. Remarks:
  984. This command sets a user to inactive, disabling the usage of Plastic SCM
  985. for that user.
  986. See the 'cm ^activateuser' command for more information about activating
  987. Plastic SCM users.
  988. This command checks whether the user exists on the underlying authentication
  989. system (e.g. ActiveDirectory, LDAP, User/Password...).
  990. To force the deactivation of a user that no longer exists on the
  991. authentication system, you can use the '--^nosolveuser' option.
  992. Examples:
  993. cm ^deactivateuser john
  994. cm ^du peter "mary collins"
  995. cm ^deactivateuser john --^server=myserver:8084
  996. cm ^deactivateuser S-1-5-21-3631250224-3045023395-1892523819-1107 --^nosolveuser
  997. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFF ==
  998. Shows differences between files, changesets, and labels.
  999. == CMD_USAGE_DIFF ==
  1000. Usage:
  1001. cm ^diff <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec> [<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>]
  1002. [<path>]
  1003. [--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
  1004. [--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
  1005. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1006. [--^ignore=(^eol | ^whitespaces | ^"eol&whitespaces" | ^none)]
  1007. [--^clean]
  1008. [--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
  1009. Shows differences between a 'source' changeset or shelveset, and a
  1010. 'destination' changeset or shelveset. The changesets can be specified
  1011. using either a changeset or label specification.
  1012. Where two specifications are given, the first will be the 'source' of
  1013. the diff; the second, the 'destination'.
  1014. If only one specification is given, the 'source' will be the parent
  1015. changeset of the specified 'destination'.
  1016. If an optional path is specified, the Diff Window will launch to show
  1017. differences between the two revision of that file.
  1018. cm ^diff <revspec1> <revspec2>
  1019. Shows differences between a pair of revisions. The differences are
  1020. shown in the Diff Window. The first revision specified will appear on
  1021. the left.
  1022. cm ^diff <brspec> [--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
  1023. [--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
  1024. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1025. [--^ignore=(^eol | ^whitespaces | ^"eol&whitespaces" | ^none)]
  1026. [--^clean]
  1027. [--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
  1028. [--^fullpaths | --^fp]
  1029. Shows the branch differences.
  1030. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  1031. Options:
  1032. --^added Prints only differences consisting of items added to
  1033. the repository.
  1034. --^changed Prints only differences consisting of items that
  1035. changed.
  1036. --^moved Prints only differences consisting of moved or renamed
  1037. items.
  1038. --^deleted Prints only differences consisting of items that were
  1039. deleted.
  1040. If '--^added', '--^changed', '--^moved' or '--^deleted' are
  1041. not specified, then the command prints all differences.
  1042. '^A' means added items.
  1043. '^C' means changed items.
  1044. '^D' means deleted items.
  1045. '^M' means moved items. The left item is the original,
  1046. the right is the destination.
  1047. --^repositorypaths Prints repository paths instead of workspace paths.
  1048. (This option overrides the '--^fullpaths' option.)
  1049. --^download Stores the differences content in the specified output
  1050. path.
  1051. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1052. See the MSDN documentation at
  1053. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1054. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1055. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1056. --^ignore Sets the specified comparison method.
  1057. See Remarks for more info.
  1058. --^clean Does not take into account the differences generated
  1059. because of a merge, but only the differences created by
  1060. simple checkins.
  1061. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1062. Remarks for more info.
  1063. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  1064. --^fullpaths, --^fp Forces printing full workspace paths for files and
  1065. directories when possible.
  1066. == CMD_HELP_DIFF ==
  1067. Remarks:
  1068. Comparison methods:
  1069. ^eol Ignores the end of line differences.
  1070. ^whitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
  1071. ^"eol&whitespaces" Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
  1072. ^none Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
  1073. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1074. The parameters of this command are the following:
  1075. {^path} Item path.
  1076. {^date} Change date/time.
  1077. {^owner} Change author.
  1078. {^revid} Revision id of the revision considered as the
  1079. destination in the diff.
  1080. {^parentrevid} Revision id of the parent of the revision considered
  1081. as the destination of the diff.
  1082. {^baserevid} Revision id of the revision considered as the source
  1083. in the diff.
  1084. {^srccmpath} Server path before moving the item (move operation).
  1085. {^dstcmpath} Server path after moving the item (move operation).
  1086. {^type} Item type:
  1087. ^D directory,
  1088. ^B binary file,
  1089. ^F text file,
  1090. ^S symlink,
  1091. ^X Xlink.
  1092. {^repository} Repository of the item.
  1093. {^status} Item status:
  1094. ^A added,
  1095. ^D deleted,
  1096. ^M moved,
  1097. ^C changed.
  1098. {^fsprotection} Shows item permissions (Linux/Mac chmod).
  1099. {^srcfsprotection} Shows parent revision item permissions.
  1100. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  1101. Notes on '^revid':
  1102. For added items, the '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' will be -1, as no
  1103. previous revision exists in this case.
  1104. For deleted items, the '^revid' is the id of the source revision, and the
  1105. '^baserevid' will be -1, as there is no destination revision.
  1106. For Xlinks, both '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' are always -1.
  1107. Examples:
  1108. Comparing branches:
  1109. cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001
  1110. cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001 \doc\readme.txt
  1111. Comparing changeset trees:
  1112. cm ^diff 19
  1113. cm ^diff 19 25
  1114. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:25 --^format="{^path} {^parentrevid}"
  1115. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^format="{^date} {^path}" --^dateformat="yy/dd/MM HH:mm:ss"
  1116. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^changed
  1117. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^repositorypaths
  1118. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^download="D:\temp"
  1119. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^clean
  1120. cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 \doc\readme.txt
  1121. Comparing label trees:
  1122. cm ^diff ^lb:FirstReleaseLabel ^lb:SecondReleaseLabel
  1123. cm ^diff ^lb:tag_193.2 ^cs:34214
  1124. cm ^diff ^cs:31492 ^lb:tag_193.2
  1125. Comparing shelve trees:
  1126. cm ^diff ^sh:2
  1127. cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
  1128. Comparing revspecs:
  1129. cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
  1130. cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
  1131. ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
  1132. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFFMETRICS ==
  1133. Shows diff metrics between two revs.
  1134. == CMD_USAGE_DIFFMETRICS ==
  1135. Usage:
  1136. cm ^diffmetrics | ^dm <revspec1> <revspec2> [--^format=<str_format>]
  1137. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1138. [--^ignore=(^eol | ^whitespaces | ^"eol&whitespaces" | ^none)]
  1139. revspec Revisions used to compare.
  1140. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
  1141. Options:
  1142. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1143. Remarks for more info.
  1144. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1145. See the MSDN documentation at
  1146. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1147. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1148. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1149. --^ignore Sets the specified comparison method.
  1150. See Remarks for more info.
  1151. == CMD_HELP_DIFFMETRICS ==
  1152. Remarks:
  1153. The metrics are: number of changed, added, and deleted lines.
  1154. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1155. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1156. {0} Number of changed lines.
  1157. {1} Number of added lines.
  1158. {2} Number of deleted lines.
  1159. Examples:
  1160. cm ^diffmetrics file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^br:/main/scm0211 \
  1161. --^format="There are {0} changed, {1} added and {2} deleted lines."
  1162. (Retrieves diffmetrics results formatted.)
  1163. cm ^dm file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^cs:3 --^encoding=utf-8 --^ignore=^whitespaces
  1164. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTEXPORT ==
  1165. Exports a repository in fast-export format.
  1166. == CMD_USAGE_FASTEXPORT ==
  1167. Usage:
  1168. cm ^fast-export | ^fe <repspec> <fast-export-file>
  1169. [--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
  1170. [--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
  1171. [--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
  1172. [--^nodata] [--^from=<changesetid>] [--^to=<changesetid>]
  1173. Options:
  1174. repspec The repository which the data will be exported from.
  1175. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
  1176. fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git fast-export
  1177. format.
  1178. --^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports. This file
  1179. has been previously exported by '--^export-marks'. The
  1180. changesets described in this file will not be imported
  1181. because they were already in a previous import.
  1182. --^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will be saved.
  1183. This file is used in a later fast-import to signal the
  1184. changesets that have been already imported.
  1185. --^branchseparator Plastic SCM uses "/" as default separator in the branch
  1186. hierarchy. This option allows using char as a hierarchy
  1187. separator, so main-task-sub would be mapped in Plastic
  1188. SCM as /main/task/sub.
  1189. --^nodata Exports the repository without including the data. This
  1190. is useful to check if the export will run correctly.
  1191. --^from Exports from a particular changeset.
  1192. --^to Exports to a particular changeset.
  1193. == CMD_HELP_FASTEXPORT ==
  1194. Remarks:
  1195. - In order to import a Plastic SCM repository to Git, use a command such as:
  1196. ^cat repo.fe.00 | ^git ^fast-import --^export-marks=marks.git --^import-marks=marks.git
  1197. - Incremental export is supported using a marks file that contains the
  1198. changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
  1199. files).
  1200. This means that only the new changesets that were not exported in the
  1201. previous fast-export will be exported.
  1202. Examples:
  1203. cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^import-marks=marks.cm \
  1204. --^export-marks=marks.cm
  1205. (Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
  1206. file in Git fast-export format and creates the marks files to perform
  1207. incremental exports later.)
  1208. cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^from=20
  1209. (Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
  1210. file in Git fast-export format from changeset '20'.)
  1211. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTIMPORT ==
  1212. Imports Git fast-export data into a repository.
  1213. == CMD_USAGE_FASTIMPORT ==
  1214. Usage:
  1215. cm ^fast-import | ^fi <repspec> <fast-export-file>
  1216. [--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
  1217. [--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
  1218. [--^stats] [--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
  1219. [--^nodata] [--^ignoremissingchangesets] [--^mastertomain]
  1220. Options:
  1221. repspec The repository into which the data will be
  1222. imported. It is created if it did not previously
  1223. exist. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more
  1224. about rep specs.)
  1225. fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git
  1226. fast-export format.
  1227. --^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports.
  1228. This file has been previously exported by
  1229. '--^export-marks'. The changesets described in
  1230. this file wont be imported because they
  1231. were already in a previous import.
  1232. --^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will
  1233. be saved. This file is used in a later
  1234. fast-import to signal the changesets that have
  1235. been already imported.
  1236. --^stats Prints some statistics about the import process.
  1237. --^branchseparator Plastic SCM uses "/" as default separator in
  1238. the branch hierarchy. This option allows using
  1239. char as a hierarchy separator, so main-task-sub
  1240. would be mapped in Plastic SCM as /main/task/sub.
  1241. --^nodata Imports Git fast-export without including the
  1242. data. This is useful to check if the import will
  1243. run correctly.
  1244. --^ignoremissingchangesets Any changesets that cannot be imported are
  1245. discarded and the fast-import operation
  1246. continues without them.
  1247. --^mastertomain Imports using "^main" instead of "^master".
  1248. == CMD_HELP_FASTIMPORT ==
  1249. Remarks:
  1250. - In order to export a git repository, use a command such as:
  1251. ^git ^fast-export --^all -^M --^signed-tags=^strip --^tag-of-filtered-object=^drop> ..\git-fast-export.dat
  1252. The -^M option is important to detect moved items.
  1253. - The specified repository is created in case it did not exist.
  1254. - Incremental import is supported using a marks file that contains the
  1255. changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
  1256. files).
  1257. This means that only the new changesets that were not imported in the
  1258. previous fast-import will be imported.
  1259. Examples:
  1260. cm ^fast-import mynewrepo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export
  1261. (Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
  1262. 'mynewrepo' repository on server 'atenea:8084'.)
  1263. cm ^fast-import repo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export --^export-marks=rep.marks
  1264. (Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
  1265. 'repo' repository on server 'atenea:8084' and creates a marks file
  1266. to perform incremental imports later.)
  1267. cm ^fast-import repo@server:8084 repo.fast-export --^import-marks=repo.marks \
  1268. --^export-marks=repo.marks
  1269. (Imports the contents of the 'repo.fast-export' file. Only the new
  1270. changesets that were not in the marks file are imported. The same marks
  1271. file is used to save the list of changesets again for the next
  1272. incremental import.)
  1273. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FILEINFO ==
  1274. Retrieves detailed information about the items in the workspace.
  1275. == CMD_USAGE_FILEINFO ==
  1276. Usage:
  1277. cm ^fileinfo <item_path>[ ...] [--^fields=<field_value>[,...]]
  1278. [[--^xml | -^x [=<output_file>]] | [--^format=<str_format>]]
  1279. [--^symlink] [--^encoding=<name>]
  1280. item_path Items to display. Use a whitespace to separate the
  1281. items.
  1282. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
  1283. spaces.
  1284. Options:
  1285. --^fields A string of comma-separated values. This selects which
  1286. fields will be printed for each item. See Remarks for
  1287. more information.
  1288. --^xml | -^x Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  1289. It is possible to specify an output file. This option
  1290. cannot be combined with '--^format'.
  1291. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1292. Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
  1293. with '--^xml'.
  1294. This '--^format' option prevails over '--^fields' if both
  1295. are specified.
  1296. --^symlink Applies the fileinfo operation to the symlink and not
  1297. to the target.
  1298. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1299. See the MSDN documentation at
  1300. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1301. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1302. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1303. == CMD_HELP_FILEINFO ==
  1304. Remarks:
  1305. This command prints a detailed list of attributes for each selected item.
  1306. Each attribute is printed on a new line by default.
  1307. The attribute list can be modified to display only the attributes the user
  1308. needs. This can be achieved using the '--^fields=<field_list>', which accepts
  1309. a string of comma-separated attribute names. This way, only those arguments
  1310. whose name has been indicated are shown.
  1311. Revision head changeset:
  1312. This option is disabled by default. Please note that retrieving this
  1313. attribute is significantly slower than the rest of them, so we advise users
  1314. to group together as many items as possible. This will improve execution
  1315. times by avoiding many separate 'cm ^fileinfo' executions.
  1316. Also, this feature is not currently available for controlled directories.
  1317. You can find below the complete list of available attribute names.
  1318. Names marked with an asterisk ('*') will not be shown by default:
  1319. ^ClientPath The local path on disk for the item.
  1320. ^RelativePath The workspace-relative path.
  1321. ^ServerPath The repository path for the item.
  1322. (Note: Transformed workspaces are not
  1323. currently supported for this option).
  1324. ^Size Item size.
  1325. ^Hash Item hash sum.
  1326. ^Owner The user the item belongs to.
  1327. ^RevisionHeadChangeset (*) The changeset of the revision loaded in the
  1328. head changeset of the branch.
  1329. (Please see note above.)
  1330. ^RevisionChangeset The changeset of the revision currently loaded
  1331. in the workspace.
  1332. ^RepSpec The repository specification for the item.
  1333. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  1334. rep specs.)
  1335. ^Status The workspace item status: added, checked out,
  1336. deleted, etc.
  1337. ^Type Revision type (text, binary, directory, symlink,
  1338. or unknown).
  1339. ^Changelist The changelist the item belongs to (if any).
  1340. ^IsLocked (*) Whether the item is locked by exclusive
  1341. checkout or not.
  1342. ^LockedBy (*) The user who exclusively checked out the item.
  1343. ^LockedWhere (*) The location where the item was exclusively
  1344. checked out.
  1345. ^IsUnderXlink Whether the item is located under an Xlink
  1346. or not.
  1347. ^UnderXlinkTarget The target of the Xlink the item is under
  1348. (if any).
  1349. ^UnderXlinkPath The item server path in the Xlinked repository
  1350. (if any).
  1351. ^UnderXlinkWritable Whether the Xlink the item belongs to is
  1352. writable or not.
  1353. ^UnderXlinkRelative Whether the Xlink the items belongs to is
  1354. relative or not.
  1355. ^IsXlink Whether the item itself is a Xlink or not.
  1356. ^XlinkTarget The target repository the item points to, if it
  1357. is a Xlink.
  1358. ^XlinkName The Xlink name of the item, if it is
  1359. actually one.
  1360. ^XlinkWritable Whether the Xlink item is a writable Xlink
  1361. or not.
  1362. ^XlinkRelative Whether the Xlink item is a relative Xlink
  1363. or not.
  1364. Output format customization:
  1365. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1366. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1367. {^ClientPath}
  1368. {^RelativePath}
  1369. {^ServerPath}
  1370. {^Size}
  1371. {^Hash}
  1372. {^Owner}
  1373. {^RevisionHeadChangeset}
  1374. {^RevisionChangeset}
  1375. {^Status}
  1376. {^Type}
  1377. {^Changelist}
  1378. {^IsLocked}
  1379. {^LockedBy}
  1380. {^LockedWhere}
  1381. {^IsUnderXlink}
  1382. {^UnderXlinkTarget}
  1383. {^UnderXlinkPath}
  1384. {^UnderXlinkWritable}
  1385. {^UnderXlinkRelative}
  1386. {^IsXlink}
  1387. {^XlinkTarget}
  1388. {^XlinkName}
  1389. {^XlinkWritable}
  1390. {^XlinkRelative}
  1391. {^RepSpec}
  1392. Please note that '--^format' and '--^xml' options are mutually exclusive, so
  1393. they can't be used at the same time.
  1394. Examples:
  1395. cm ^fileinfo file1.txt file2.txt dir/
  1396. cm ^fileinfo "New Project.csproj" --^xml
  1397. cm ^fileinfo assets.art --^fields=^ServerPath,^Size,^IsLocked,^LockedBy
  1398. cm ^fileinfo proj_specs.docx --^fields=^ServerPath,^RevisionChangeset --^xml
  1399. cm ^fileinfo samples.ogg --^format="{^ServerPath}[{^Owner}] -> {^Size}"
  1400. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FIND_QUERY ==
  1401. Runs SQL-like queries to find Plastic SCM objects.
  1402. == CMD_USAGE_FIND_QUERY ==
  1403. Usage:
  1404. cm ^find <object_type>
  1405. [^where <str_conditions>]
  1406. [^on ^repository '<repspec>' | ^on ^repositories '<repspec1>','<repspec2>'[,...]]
  1407. [--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  1408. [--^nototal] [--^file=<dump_file>] [--^xml]
  1409. [--^encoding=<name>]
  1410. object_type Object type to find.
  1411. Use 'cm ^help ^showfindobjects' to learn how to specify
  1412. these objects.
  1413. You can also read the 'cm ^find' guide:
  1414. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
  1415. Options:
  1416. str_conditions Searches conditions on an object attributes.
  1417. repspec Searches repositories alias or specification.
  1418. In the case of '^on ^repositories', use a comma to
  1419. separate the repspec fields.
  1420. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  1421. specifications.)
  1422. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format.
  1423. Read the 'cm ^find' guide to see all the object
  1424. attributes that can be used as output format strings:
  1425. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
  1426. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  1427. --^nototal Does not output record count at the end.
  1428. --^file File to dump results.
  1429. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  1430. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  1431. See the MSDN documentation at
  1432. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  1433. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  1434. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  1435. == CMD_HELP_FIND_QUERY ==
  1436. Remarks:
  1437. If no repository is specified, the search is made on the repository
  1438. configured in the workspace.
  1439. When you run queries using comparison operators (>, <, >=, <=) from the
  1440. command line, remember that the shell considers these operators as IO
  1441. redirections. So you will need to enclose the queries in double quotation
  1442. marks.
  1443. The 'cm ^find' command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1444. Each output parameter is identified by a string and the user can refer it
  1445. by typing the parameter number between '{' and '}' brackets.
  1446. Output parameters usually correspond to the attributes of the object.
  1447. These are some valid output format strings:
  1448. --^format={^id}{^date}{^name}
  1449. --^format="{^item}#{^branch} ^with ^date {^date}"
  1450. XML and encoding considerations:
  1451. When the '--^xml' option is specified, the command shows the command result
  1452. as an XML text in the standard output. The operating system default encoding
  1453. is used to show the text, so it is possible that not-ANSI characters are
  1454. incorrectly visualized in the console. If you redirect the command output to
  1455. a file, it will be correctly visualized. When both '--^xml' and '--^file'
  1456. options are specified, the default encoding will be utf-8.
  1457. Examples:
  1458. cm ^find ^revision
  1459. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset=23 ^and ^owner='maria'"
  1460. cm ^find ^branch "^on ^repository 'rep1'"
  1461. cm ^find ^label "^on ^repositories 'rep1', '^rep:default@localhost:8084'"
  1462. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^parent='^br:/main' ^on ^repository 'rep1'"
  1463. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}"
  1464. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^xml --^file=c:\queryresults\revs.xml
  1465. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHANGED ==
  1466. Gets a list of changed files. This command is deprecated and kept just for
  1467. backwards compatibility. Use 'cm ^status' instead.
  1468. == CMD_USAGE_FINDCHANGED ==
  1469. Usage:
  1470. cm ^findchanged | ^fc [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^checkcontent]
  1471. [--^onlychanged] [<path>]
  1472. Options:
  1473. -^R Recursively finds in directories.
  1474. --^checkcontent Compares files by content.
  1475. --^onlychanged Finds only changed files; checkouts will not be
  1476. obtained.
  1477. path (Default: current directory.)
  1478. Initial path to find changed files.
  1479. == CMD_HELP_FINDCHANGED ==
  1480. Remarks:
  1481. If no '--^checkcontent' option is given, Plastic finds changes based on the
  1482. file timestamp. When '--^checkcontent' option is specified, the file or
  1483. folder contents are compared, instead of using the timestamp.
  1484. This command is useful to detect changed files while disconnected from
  1485. the Plastic SCM server. The output can be piped to the checkout command,
  1486. to check the changes later (see examples).
  1487. Examples:
  1488. cm ^findchanged .
  1489. (Finds changed files in the current directory.)
  1490. cm ^findchanged -^R . | cm ^checkout -
  1491. (Checkouts changed elements.)
  1492. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
  1493. Gets a list of checked out items. This command is deprecated and kept just for
  1494. backwards compatibility. Use 'cm ^status' instead.
  1495. == CMD_USAGE_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
  1496. Usage:
  1497. cm ^findcheckouts | ^fco [--^format=<str_format>] [--^basepath]
  1498. Options:
  1499. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1500. Remarks for more info.
  1501. --^basepath The path to start searching checkouts from. If not
  1502. specified, the current path is used.
  1503. == CMD_HELP_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
  1504. Remarks:
  1505. This command is useful to checkin or undocheckout all checked out items in
  1506. one single step, redirecting the standard output to other command.
  1507. See examples.
  1508. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1509. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1510. {0} Date.
  1511. {1} Owner.
  1512. {2} Workspace info.
  1513. {3} Client machine name.
  1514. {4} Item path.
  1515. {5} Branch and repository info.
  1516. Examples:
  1517. cm ^findcheckouts --^format="File {4} changed on branch {5}"
  1518. (Finds checked out items and formats the output with file path and branch
  1519. and repository info.)
  1520. cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^checkin -
  1521. (Checkins all checked out items.)
  1522. cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^undocheckout -
  1523. (Undocheckouts of all checked out items.)
  1524. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDPRIVATE ==
  1525. Gets a list of private items. This command is deprecated and kept just for
  1526. backwards compatibility. Use 'cm ^status' instead.
  1527. == CMD_USAGE_FINDPRIVATE ==
  1528. Usage:
  1529. cm ^findprivate | ^fp [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^exclusions] [<path>]
  1530. Options:
  1531. -^R Recursively finds in directories.
  1532. --^exclusions This option allows cutting the search inside the ignored
  1533. paths, defined by the file ignore.conf.
  1534. path (Default: current directory.)
  1535. Initial path to find private files.
  1536. == CMD_HELP_FINDPRIVATE ==
  1537. Remarks:
  1538. If any path is specified, Plastic SCM will begin searching from the
  1539. current directory.
  1540. This command is useful to add private items on a folder, piping the output
  1541. to the add command. See examples.
  1542. Examples:
  1543. cm ^findprivate .
  1544. cm ^findprivate -^R | cm ^add -
  1545. (Recursively searches private items and add them.)
  1546. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETCONFIG ==
  1547. Obtains configuration info.
  1548. == CMD_USAGE_GETCONFIG ==
  1549. Usage:
  1550. cm ^getconfig [^setfileasreadonly] [^location] [^extensionworkingmode]
  1551. [^extensionprefix] [^defaultrepserver]
  1552. ^setfileasreadonly Returns whether the protected files are left as
  1553. read-only or not.
  1554. ^location Returns the client config path.
  1555. ^extensionworkingmode Returns the extension working mode.
  1556. ^extensionprefix Returns the configured extension prefix.
  1557. ^defaultrepserver Returns the location of the default repository
  1558. server.
  1559. == CMD_HELP_GETCONFIG ==
  1560. Examples:
  1561. cm ^getconfig ^setfileasreadonly
  1562. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETFILE ==
  1563. Downloads the content of a given revision.
  1564. == CMD_USAGE_GETFILE ==
  1565. Usage:
  1566. cm ^getfile | ^cat <revspec> [--^file=<output_file>] [--^debug]
  1567. [--^symlink] [--^raw]
  1568. revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  1569. more about specs.)
  1570. Options:
  1571. --^file File to save the output. By default, it is printed on the
  1572. standard output.
  1573. --^debug When a directory specification is used, the command
  1574. shows all the items in the directory, its revision id
  1575. and file system protection.
  1576. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  1577. target.
  1578. --^raw Displays the raw data of the file.
  1579. == CMD_HELP_GETFILE ==
  1580. Examples:
  1581. cm ^cat myfile.txt#^br:/main
  1582. (Obtains the last revision in branch '^br:/main' of 'myfile.txt'.)
  1583. cm ^getfile myfile.txt#^cs:3 --^file=tmp.txt
  1584. (Obtains the changeset 3 of 'myfile.txt' and write it to file 'tmp.txt'.)
  1585. cm ^cat ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^br:/main/task003@myrepo
  1586. (Obtains the contents of '/src/foo.c' at the last changeset of branch
  1587. '/main/task003' in repository 'myrepo')
  1588. cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
  1589. (Obtains the revision with id 1230.)
  1590. cm ^getfile ^rev:info\ --^debug
  1591. (Obtains all revisions in the 'info' directory.)
  1592. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETREVISION ==
  1593. Loads a revision in the workspace.
  1594. == CMD_USAGE_GETREVISION ==
  1595. This command modifies the revision loaded in the workspace, so it can affect
  1596. future merges.
  1597. It is an advanced command inherited from old versions, so use it with care.
  1598. Usage:
  1599. cm ^getrevision <revspec>
  1600. revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  1601. more about rev specs.)
  1602. == CMD_HELP_GETREVISION ==
  1603. Examples:
  1604. cm ^getrevision file.txt#^cs:3
  1605. (Gets changeset 3 revision of 'file.txt'.)
  1606. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETSTATUS ==
  1607. Gets the status of an item.
  1608. == CMD_USAGE_GETSTATUS ==
  1609. This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
  1610. It is not as user friendly as it should be.
  1611. Usage:
  1612. cm ^getstatus | ^gs <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^stats]
  1613. [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  1614. item_path Item or items to get status from. Use double quotes
  1615. (" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
  1616. whitespace to separate paths.
  1617. Options:
  1618. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1619. Remarks for more info.
  1620. --^stats Prints some statistics about the get status process.
  1621. -^R Shows recursively the status in directories.
  1622. == CMD_HELP_GETSTATUS ==
  1623. Remarks:
  1624. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1625. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1626. {0} Item path.
  1627. {1} Item status:
  1628. 0 private,
  1629. 1 checked in,
  1630. 2 checked out.
  1631. Reading input from stdin:
  1632. The '^getstatus' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  1633. single dash "-".
  1634. Example: cm ^getstatus -
  1635. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  1636. This allows you to use pipe to specify which paths to get the status for.
  1637. Example:
  1638. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^getstatus --^format="Path {0} Status {1}" -
  1639. (In Windows, gets the status of all .c files in the workspace.)
  1640. Examples:
  1641. cm ^getstatus file1.txt file2.txt
  1642. (Gets the status of the files.)
  1643. cm ^gs info\ -^R --^format="The item {0} has the status {1}"
  1644. (Gets the status of the directory and all of its items and shows a
  1645. formatted output.)
  1646. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
  1647. Gets branches linked with a task.
  1648. == CMD_USAGE_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
  1649. This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
  1650. It is not as user friendly as it should be.
  1651. Usage:
  1652. cm ^gettaskbranches | ^gtb <task_name> [--^format=<str_format>]
  1653. [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  1654. task_name The task identifier.
  1655. Options:
  1656. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1657. Remarks for more info.
  1658. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  1659. == CMD_HELP_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
  1660. Remarks:
  1661. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1662. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1663. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  1664. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  1665. {^name} Branch name.
  1666. {^owner} Owner of the branch.
  1667. {^date} Date when the branch was created.
  1668. {^type} Branch type ('T' if it is smart or 'F' if not).
  1669. {^parent} Parent branch.
  1670. {^comment} Comment of the branch.
  1671. {^repname} Repository where the branch exists.
  1672. {^repserver} Server name.
  1673. Examples:
  1674. cm ^gettaskbranches 4311
  1675. cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name}"
  1676. cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name} {^date}" --^dateformat="yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm:ss"
  1677. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETWWI ==
  1678. Shows info about the workspace selector.
  1679. == CMD_USAGE_GETWWI ==
  1680. Usage:
  1681. cm ^wi [<wk_path>]
  1682. Options:
  1683. wk_path Path of a workspace on the machine.
  1684. == CMD_HELP_GETWWI ==
  1685. Remarks:
  1686. The '^wi' command shows the working configuration of a workspace (repository,
  1687. branch, and/or label).
  1688. Examples:
  1689. cm ^wi c:\mywk
  1690. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_GWP ==
  1691. Gets workspace info from a path.
  1692. == CMD_USAGE_GWP ==
  1693. This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
  1694. It is not as user friendly as it should be.
  1695. Usage:
  1696. cm ^getworkspacefrompath | ^gwp <item_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
  1697. item_path File or folder on disk.
  1698. Options:
  1699. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  1700. Remarks for more info.
  1701. == CMD_HELP_GWP ==
  1702. Remarks:
  1703. This command shows information about the workspace that is located in path.
  1704. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  1705. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  1706. {0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
  1707. {1} | {^wkpath} Workspace path.
  1708. {2} | {^machine} Client machine name.
  1709. {3} | {^owner} Workspace owner.
  1710. {4} | {^guid} Workspace GUID.
  1711. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  1712. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  1713. Examples:
  1714. cm ^gwp c:\myworkspace\code\file1.cpp --^format="Workspace name: {^wkname}"
  1715. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_HELP ==
  1716. Gets help for a Plastic SCM command.
  1717. == CMD_USAGE_HELP ==
  1718. Usage:
  1719. cm ^help <command>
  1720. == CMD_HELP_HELP ==
  1721. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_IOSTATS ==
  1722. Shows statistics about the hardware.
  1723. == CMD_USAGE_IOSTATS ==
  1724. Usage:
  1725. cm ^iostats [<repserverspec>] [<list_of_tests>[ ...]]
  1726. [--^nettotalmb=<value_mb>] [--^networkiterations=<value_iter>]
  1727. [--^diskdatasize=<value_size>] [--^disktestpath=<value_path>]
  1728. [--^systemdisplaytime=<value_time>]
  1729. [--^systemdisplaytimeinterval=<value_interval>]
  1730. Options:
  1731. repserverspec An available Plastic SCM server to perform
  1732. the network tests, such as "serverUploadTest"
  1733. and/ or "serverDownloadTest".
  1734. If no server is provided, the command tries
  1735. to communicate with the server configured by
  1736. default.
  1737. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  1738. server specs.)
  1739. list_of_tests Available tests. Use a whitespace to separate
  1740. test fields.
  1741. See Remarks for more info.
  1742. --^nettotalmb Indicates the amount of user data (in
  1743. MegaBytes) transmitted on a network test,
  1744. such as "^serverDownloadTest" or
  1745. "^serverUploadTest".
  1746. It must be a value between "4" and "512".
  1747. (Default: 16)
  1748. --^networkiterations Indicates the number of iterations of
  1749. "^serverDownloadTest" and/or "^serverUploadTest"
  1750. that will be run.
  1751. It must be a value between "1" and "100".
  1752. (Default: 1)
  1753. --^diskdatasize Indicates the amount of data (in MegaBytes)
  1754. that will be written and then read on the
  1755. "^diskTest".
  1756. It must be a value between "100" and "4096".
  1757. (Default: 512)
  1758. --^disktestpath Path where the "^diskTest" writes the test
  1759. files. If this parameter is not provided,
  1760. the command will try to use the system temp
  1761. path.
  1762. --^systemdisplaytime Time interval (in seconds) showing the usage
  1763. of system resources. This option is available
  1764. for the following tests: "^systemNetworkUsage"
  1765. and "^systemDiskUsage".
  1766. It must be a value between "1" and "3600".
  1767. (Default: 5 seconds).
  1768. --^systemdisplaytimeinterval Time interval (in seconds) between the
  1769. system performance samples. This option is
  1770. available for the following tests:
  1771. "^systemNetworkUsage" and "^systemDiskUsage".
  1772. It must be a value between "1" and "60".
  1773. (Default: 1 second).
  1774. == CMD_HELP_IOSTATS ==
  1775. Remarks:
  1776. This command requires an available server be used during the network
  1777. speed tests ("^serverUploadTest" and/or "^serverDownloadTest").
  1778. The '--^diskTestPath' must point to a path that belongs to the physical
  1779. disk drive about to be tested. If no path is specified, the command tries
  1780. to use the system default temp path.
  1781. The disk drive of the specified path must have enough free space to execute
  1782. the test.
  1783. During the command execution, the system can experience a degraded
  1784. performance caused by the tests performed.
  1785. Available tests:
  1786. --^serveruploadtest (Default) Measures the data upload speed from
  1787. Plastic SCM client to the server.
  1788. --^serverdownloadtest (Default) Measures the data download speed from
  1789. Plastic SCM server to the client.
  1790. --^disktest (Default) Measures the disk read speed and disk
  1791. write speed.
  1792. --^systemnetworkusage Shows the current usage of system network
  1793. resources.
  1794. (It shows Network Interface performance counters
  1795. provided by Microsoft Windows).
  1796. Available in Microsoft Windows only.
  1797. --^systemdiskusage Shows the current usage of system physical
  1798. disks.
  1799. (It shows Network Interface performance counters
  1800. provided by Microsoft Windows).
  1801. Available in Microsoft Windows only.
  1802. Examples:
  1803. cm ^iostats MYSERVER:8087 --^serveruploadtest --^serverdownloadtest --^nettotalmb=32
  1804. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ISSUETRACKER ==
  1805. Gets, updates, or finds the issue status in the specified issue tracker.
  1806. == CMD_USAGE_ISSUETRACKER ==
  1807. Usage:
  1808. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^get <task_id> <parameter>[ ...]
  1809. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^update <task_id> <status> <parameter>[ ...]
  1810. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^find <status> <parameter>[ ...]
  1811. cm ^issuetracker <name> ^connection ^check <parameter>[ ...]
  1812. name Name of the issue tracker to connect with.
  1813. Only Jira is supported at the moment.
  1814. task_id Number of the issue to query or update.
  1815. ^status A valid status for an issue in the issue tracker.
  1816. Jira parameters (all are mandatory):
  1817. --^user=<user> The user to authenticate.
  1818. --^password=<password> The password to authenticate.
  1819. --^host=<url> The target url of the issue tracker.
  1820. --^projectkey=<key> The project key of Jira project.
  1821. == CMD_HELP_ISSUETRACKER ==
  1822. Examples:
  1823. cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^get 11 --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
  1824. --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1825. (Gets the status of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
  1826. cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^update 11 "Done" --^user=user@mail.es \
  1827. --^password=pwd --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1828. (Updates the status to 'Done' of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
  1829. cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^find "Done" --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
  1830. --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1831. (Gets the task ids whose status is set to 'Done' for the 'PRJ' project-)
  1832. cm ^issuetracker jira ^connection ^check --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
  1833. --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
  1834. (Checks whether the configuration parameters are valid or not.)
  1835. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LICENSEINFO ==
  1836. Displays license information and license usage.
  1837. == CMD_USAGE_LICENSEINFO ==
  1838. Usage:
  1839. cm ^licenseinfo | ^li [--^server=<repserverspec>] [--^inactive] [--^active]
  1840. [--^sort=(^name|^status)]
  1841. Options:
  1842. --^server Gets the license info from the specified server.
  1843. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  1844. one configured on the client.
  1845. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver
  1846. specs.)
  1847. --^inactive Shows only inactive users in the "license usage" section.
  1848. --^active Shows only active users in the "license usage" section.
  1849. --^sort Sorts users by one of the specified sort options:
  1850. '^name' or '^status'.
  1851. == CMD_HELP_LICENSEINFO ==
  1852. Remarks:
  1853. The information displayed consists of expiration date, activated and
  1854. deactivated users, etc.
  1855. Examples:
  1856. cm ^licenseinfo
  1857. cm ^licenseinfo --^server=myserver:8084
  1858. cm ^licenseinfo --^sort=^name
  1859. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LINKTASK ==
  1860. Links a changeset to a task.
  1861. == CMD_USAGE_LINKTASK ==
  1862. This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
  1863. It is not as user friendly as it should be.
  1864. Usage:
  1865. cm ^linktask | ^lt <csetspec> <ext_prefix> <task_name>
  1866. csetspec The full changeset specification to link to a task.
  1867. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  1868. specs.)
  1869. ext_prefix The extension prefix of the configured issue tracking
  1870. system to work with.
  1871. task_name The task identifier on the issue tracking system.
  1872. == CMD_HELP_LINKTASK ==
  1873. Examples:
  1874. cm ^lt ^cs:8@^rep:default@^repserver:localhost:8084 jira PRJ-1
  1875. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_LIST ==
  1876. Shows locks on a server.
  1877. == CMD_USAGE_LOCK_LIST ==
  1878. Usage:
  1879. cm ^lock ^list | ^ls [<revspec> [ ...]] [--^server=<server>]
  1880. [--^onlycurrentuser] [--^onlycurrentworkspace]
  1881. [--^ignorecase]
  1882. revspec If one or more are present, this command will display
  1883. one lock line for each specified revision if its
  1884. associated item is locked in the server. Otherwise,
  1885. this command will list all locked items in the default
  1886. server (or the one set with the '--^server' option)
  1887. Use a whitespace to separate the rev specs when using
  1888. more than one.
  1889. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
  1890. Options:
  1891. --^server Repository server specification.
  1892. This option will override the default server which
  1893. is retrieved from the current workspace or the
  1894. client.conf file.
  1895. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  1896. server specs.)
  1897. --^onlycurrentuser Filters the results showing only the locks performed
  1898. by the current user.
  1899. --^onlycurrentworkspace Filters the results showing only the locks performed
  1900. on the current workspace (matching them by name).
  1901. --^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths when a serverpath spec
  1902. is used. With this flag, the command will work for
  1903. "/src/foo.c" even if the user writes "/sRc/fOO.c".
  1904. == CMD_HELP_LOCK_LIST ==
  1905. Remarks:
  1906. The command will display a list of the currently locked items in the
  1907. default server. It also accepts a list of revision specifications; in that
  1908. case, only the locks belonging to the selected items will be displayed.
  1909. A '--^server=<server>' can be used to set the default server to query.
  1910. The command shows a line for every lock in the specified server:
  1911. - GUID of the locked item.
  1912. - User name who performed the lock.
  1913. - Workspace name where the lock was performed.
  1914. - Path of the locked item (server path format).
  1915. Examples:
  1916. cm ^lock ^list
  1917. cm ^lock ^list --^server=myserver:8084
  1918. cm ^lock ^ls ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^cs:99@default@localhost:8084
  1919. cm ^lock ^list ^revid:3521@default ^itemid:2381@secondary --^onlycurrentuser
  1920. cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser
  1921. cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser --^onlycurrentworkspace
  1922. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LISTUSERS ==
  1923. Lists users and groups.
  1924. == CMD_USAGE_LISTUSERS ==
  1925. Usage:
  1926. cm ^listusers | ^lu <repserverspec> [--^onlyusers] [--^onlygroups]
  1927. [--^filter= <str_filter>]
  1928. repserverspec Repository server specification.
  1929. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  1930. Options:
  1931. --^onlyusers Lists only users.
  1932. --^onlygroups Lists only groups.
  1933. --^filter Lists only users and/or groups that matches the
  1934. specified filter.
  1935. == CMD_HELP_LISTUSERS ==
  1936. Examples:
  1937. cm ^lu localhost:8084
  1938. (Lists all users in the server.)
  1939. cm ^listusers localhost:8084 --^onlyusers --^filter=m
  1940. (Lists only the users in the server that contains "m".)
  1941. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCATION ==
  1942. Returns the path of 'cm'.
  1943. == CMD_USAGE_LOCATION ==
  1944. Usage:
  1945. cm ^location
  1946. == CMD_HELP_LOCATION ==
  1947. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK ==
  1948. This command allows the user to manage locks.
  1949. == CMD_USAGE_LOCK ==
  1950. Usage:
  1951. cm ^lock <command> [options]
  1952. Commands:
  1953. ^list | ^ls
  1954. ^unlock
  1955. To get more information about each command run:
  1956. cm ^lock <command> --^usage
  1957. cm ^lock <command> --^help
  1958. == CMD_HELP_LOCK ==
  1959. Examples:
  1960. cm ^lock ^list
  1961. cm ^lock
  1962. ('^list' is optional if there are no arguments.)
  1963. cm ^lock ^ls ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^cs:99@default@localhost:8084
  1964. cm ^lock ^unlock 91961b14-3dfe-4062-8c4c-f33a81d201f5
  1965. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOG ==
  1966. Gets info about revisions in changesets.
  1967. == CMD_USAGE_LOG ==
  1968. Usage:
  1969. cm ^log [<csetspec> | <repspec>] [--^from=<csetspec_from>] [--^allbranches]
  1970. [--^ancestors] [--^csformat=<str_format>] [--^itemformat=<str_format>]
  1971. [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  1972. [--^repositorypaths | --^fullpaths | --^fp]
  1973. Options:
  1974. csetspec The command will return every change made in the
  1975. changeset which specification is provided.
  1976. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  1977. specs.)
  1978. repspec The command will list all changes made in the specified
  1979. repository.
  1980. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  1981. specs.)
  1982. --^from Lists all the changes made in every changeset from the
  1983. changeset specification [csetspec_from] to the
  1984. changeset specification [csetspec].
  1985. The [csetspec_from] changeset is not included in the
  1986. output.
  1987. Ignored when a repository spec is provided.
  1988. --^allbranches Shows information about the changesets created in a
  1989. specified interval, for all the branches where those
  1990. changesets were created.
  1991. --^ancestors Shows information about the reachable changesets by
  1992. following the parent and merge links for the given
  1993. changeset ([csetspec]). If the from changeset
  1994. ([csetspec_from]) is provided too, it will be used as
  1995. lower limit for all the paths. Remarks: The changeset
  1996. changes will not be shown when this option is used.
  1997. --^csformat Retrieves the changeset info in a specific format. See
  1998. Remarks for more info.
  1999. --^itemformat Retrieves the item info in a specific format. See
  2000. Remarks for more info.
  2001. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  2002. It is possible to specify an output file.
  2003. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  2004. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  2005. See the MSDN documentation at
  2006. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  2007. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  2008. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  2009. --^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing full workspace paths for files and
  2010. directories when possible.
  2011. --^repositorypaths Prints repository paths (server paths) instead of
  2012. workspace paths. (This option overrides the
  2013. '--^fullpaths' option).
  2014. == CMD_HELP_LOG ==
  2015. Remarks:
  2016. - If neither 'csetspec' nor option is specified, the command shows
  2017. information about every changeset created within the last month in every
  2018. branch.
  2019. - If only the option '--^from' is included, the command shows the
  2020. information about every changeset from that specified changeset to the
  2021. last changeset, in the branch where the changeset was created.
  2022. - If the option '--^allbranches' appears without an interval, the command
  2023. retrieves the same information as it would do if only 'csetspec' was
  2024. specified.
  2025. - If the '--^from' is used, the output contains information from the
  2026. 'csetspec_from'+1 on.
  2027. - The repository used to show the changeset information is the one loaded
  2028. in the path where the command executes on.
  2029. This command accepts a format string for the items ('--^itemformat') and a
  2030. format string for the changesets ('--^csformat').
  2031. The output parameters of '--^csformat' are the following:
  2032. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  2033. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  2034. {^changesetid} Changeset number.
  2035. {^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
  2036. {^date} Date of the changeset.
  2037. {^owner} Owner of the changeset.
  2038. {^comment} Comment of the changeset.
  2039. {^items} Items involved in the changeset.
  2040. {^repository} Repository where the changeset exists.
  2041. {^repserver} Server name.
  2042. The output parameters of '--^itemformat' are the following:
  2043. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  2044. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  2045. {^path} Item path.
  2046. {^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
  2047. {^date} Date of the changeset.
  2048. {^owner} Owner of the changeset.
  2049. {^shortstatus} Prints the short format. See below.
  2050. {^fullstatus} Prints the long format. See below.
  2051. Short format and its corresponding long format:
  2052. '^A' ^Added
  2053. '^D' ^Deleted
  2054. '^M' ^Moved
  2055. '^C' ^Changed
  2056. These are valid output strings:
  2057. --^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on {^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
  2058. --^itemformat="{^newline}The item {^path} was changed in the branch {^branch}."
  2059. Examples:
  2060. cm ^log
  2061. (Shows information about every changeset created in the last month in every
  2062. branch.)
  2063. cm ^log ^cs:16
  2064. (Shows information about the changes done in the changeset 16 in the branch
  2065. where the changeset was created.)
  2066. cm ^log ^cs:16 --^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on \
  2067. {^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
  2068. (Shows the information in the specified format.)
  2069. cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50
  2070. (Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
  2071. from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50.)
  2072. cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50 --^allbranches
  2073. (Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
  2074. from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50 in every branch of the
  2075. repository.)
  2076. cm ^log ^rep:myrep@localhost:8084
  2077. (Shows information about the changes done in the specified repository.
  2078. No workspace is required to run the command.)
  2079. cm ^log --^from=^cs:20@^rep:mainRep@localhost:8084
  2080. (Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
  2081. from the changeset 21. No workspace is required to run the command, because
  2082. the full changeset spec was specified.)
  2083. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LS ==
  2084. Lists the contents of a tree.
  2085. == CMD_USAGE_LS ==
  2086. Usage:
  2087. cm ^ls | ^dir [<paths>[ ...]] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^symlink]
  2088. [--^selector[=<selector_format>]] [--^tree=<obj_spec>]
  2089. [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  2090. [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  2091. Options:
  2092. paths List of paths to show. Use a whitespace to separate
  2093. paths.
  2094. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
  2095. spaces.
  2096. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2097. Remarks for more info.
  2098. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  2099. target.
  2100. --^selector Gets the content from the active workspace selector.
  2101. If selector_format is specified, then lists the
  2102. specified selector.
  2103. This is mostly deprecated since selectors are
  2104. no longer a central part of Plastic SCM since 4.x.
  2105. --^tree Lists the tree in the specified changeset or branch.
  2106. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  2107. -^R Lists recursively.
  2108. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  2109. It is possible to specify an output file.
  2110. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  2111. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  2112. See the MSDN documentation at
  2113. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  2114. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  2115. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  2116. == CMD_HELP_LS ==
  2117. Remarks:
  2118. - Path can be typed with meta-characters.
  2119. - The list depends on the workspace selector.
  2120. - The output of the command can be formatted specifying a format string.
  2121. - If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are specified, the given
  2122. path must be a server path (a.k.a.: 'cm path'): /dir/file.txt, not a
  2123. workspace path: C:\Users\myuser\mywk\dir\file.txt
  2124. - If no path is provided, the workspace path assumed is the current
  2125. directory. If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are used, then
  2126. the root path ("/") is assumed.
  2127. The default format string is:
  2128. "{^size,10} {^date:dd/MM/yyyy} {^date:HH:mm}\
  2129. {^type,-6} {^location,-12} {^checkout,-5} {^name}\
  2130. {^symlinktarget}"
  2131. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2132. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2133. {^size}
  2134. {^formattedsize}
  2135. {^date}
  2136. {^type}
  2137. ^dir directory,
  2138. ^txt text file,
  2139. ^File file.
  2140. {^location} Example: ^br:branch#cset
  2141. {^checkout}
  2142. {^name}
  2143. {^changeset}
  2144. {^path}
  2145. {^repspec}
  2146. {^owner}
  2147. {^revid}
  2148. {^parentrevid}
  2149. {^itemid}
  2150. {^brid}
  2151. {^repid}
  2152. {^server}
  2153. {^symlinktarget}
  2154. {^hash}
  2155. {^chmod}
  2156. {^wkpath} Path relative to workspace root
  2157. {^branch}
  2158. {^newlocation} cset@branch
  2159. {^guid} (Will take longer to resolve)
  2160. {^itemguid}
  2161. {^transformed} Show applied rule for transformed items
  2162. You can customize the '^ls' format setting the PLASTIC_LS_FORMAT environment
  2163. variable.
  2164. Examples:
  2165. cm ^ls
  2166. cm ^ls c:\workspace\src
  2167. cm ^ls --^format={^name}
  2168. (Only file names.)
  2169. cm ^ls --^symlink
  2170. (Displays information about the symlink instead of the 'symlinked' file or
  2171. directory. Available on UNIX environments.)
  2172. cm ^ls code --^selector
  2173. (Shows the content of the 'code' subdirectory from the current workspace
  2174. selector.)
  2175. cm ^ls /code --^selector="^rep 'myrep' ^path '/' ^branch '/^main'"
  2176. (Shows the content of the '/code' subdirectory on the specified selector.
  2177. Note that the path is specified in server format.)
  2178. cm ^ls /code --^tree=44@myrep@denver:7070
  2179. (Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset 44 at repo 'myrep' at server
  2180. 'denver:7070'.)
  2181. cm ^ls /code --^tree=^br:/main/scm13596@myrep@denver:7070
  2182. (Lists the '/code' subdirectory at the latest changeset in branch
  2183. '/main/scm13596' at repo 'myrep' at server 'denver:7070'.)
  2184. cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@myrep@denver:7070
  2185. (Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset
  2186. ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77 at repo 'myrep' at server
  2187. 'denver:7070'.)
  2188. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_LIST ==
  2189. Lists the triggers of a given type on a server.
  2190. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_LIST ==
  2191. Usage:
  2192. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^list | ^ls [<subtype-type>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  2193. [--^format=<str_format>]
  2194. Options:
  2195. subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  2196. Type 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
  2197. types.
  2198. --^server Lists the triggers on the specified server.
  2199. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  2200. one configured on the client.
  2201. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
  2202. specs.)
  2203. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2204. Remarks for more info.
  2205. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_LIST ==
  2206. Remarks:
  2207. If the type is not specified, lists all the triggers on the server.
  2208. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2209. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2210. {0} Trigger position.
  2211. {1} Trigger name.
  2212. {2} Trigger path.
  2213. {3} Trigger owner.
  2214. {4} Trigger type.
  2215. {5} Trigger filter.
  2216. Examples:
  2217. cm ^trigger list after-mklabel
  2218. cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
  2219. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
  2220. Changes the selector to a date.
  2221. == CMD_USAGE_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
  2222. This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
  2223. It is not as user friendly as it should be.
  2224. Usage:
  2225. cm ^manipulateselector | ^ms [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>] --^atdate=<sel_date>
  2226. wk_path Path of the workspace.
  2227. wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  2228. learn more about specs.)
  2229. Options:
  2230. --^atdate Returns a selector that will recreate the workspace as
  2231. it would have looked at the specified date.
  2232. == CMD_HELP_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
  2233. Remarks:
  2234. If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
  2235. current directory as workspace path.
  2236. Examples:
  2237. cm ^manipulateselector c:\workspace --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2238. cm ^manipulateselector --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2239. cm ^manipulateselector > mySelector.txt --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2240. cm ^manipulateselector ^wk:build_wk@BUILDER --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
  2241. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_MERGE ==
  2242. Merges a branch with another branch.
  2243. == CMD_USAGE_MERGE ==
  2244. Usage:
  2245. cm ^merge <source_spec> [--^merge] [--^cherrypicking] [--^forced]
  2246. [--^mergetype=(^onlyone|^onlysrc|^onlydst|^try|^forced)]
  2247. [--^interval-origin=<csetspec> | --^ancestor=<csetspec>]
  2248. [--^keepsource | --^ks] [--^keepdestination | --^kd]
  2249. [--^automaticresolution=<conflict-types>[;...]]
  2250. [--^subtractive] [--^mount] [--^printcontributors]
  2251. [--^noprintoperations] [--^silent]
  2252. [(--^to=<brspec> | --^destination=<brspec>)[--^shelve]]
  2253. [--^no-dst-changes]
  2254. [-^c=<str_comment> | --^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  2255. [--^resolveconflict --^conflict=<index>
  2256. --^resolutionoption=(^src|^dst|(^rename --^resolutioninfo=<strname>))
  2257. --^mergeresultfile=<path> --^solvedconflictsfile=<path>]
  2258. [--^nointeractiveresolution]
  2259. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  2260. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  2261. source_spec Specification of the source object to merge from:
  2262. - a branch specification: '[^br:/]br_name'
  2263. - a label specification: '^lb:lb_name'
  2264. - a changeset specification: '^cs:cs_number'
  2265. - a shelve specification: '^sh:shelve_number'
  2266. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  2267. Options:
  2268. --^merge Performs the merge. Otherwise, prints the
  2269. conflicts found.
  2270. --^cherrypicking Merges the changes included on the source
  2271. changesets. This option is not used if the merge
  2272. source specification is a label.
  2273. --^forced Does not check if the source and destination are
  2274. already connected.
  2275. This option is only available for interval merge
  2276. and cherrypicking.
  2277. --^mergetype See Remarks for more info.
  2278. --^interval-origin Specifies which changeset is chosen as the
  2279. interval origin, so the merge will only take the
  2280. differences between the source changeset and the
  2281. specified interval origin.
  2282. --^ancestor This is an alias of --^interval-origin.
  2283. --^keepsource Accepts all changes from source contributor for
  2284. items with conflicts.
  2285. --^keepdestination Preserves changes from destination contributor
  2286. for items with conflicts.
  2287. --^automaticresolution Used to resolve directory conflicts. This option
  2288. lets you choose whether the source or the
  2289. destination contributor should be automatically
  2290. selected to resolve the conflict.
  2291. Use a semicolon to separate conflict types.
  2292. See Remarks for more info.
  2293. --^subtractive Deletes changes introduced by a merge. The
  2294. parameter passed to the command (source_spec) is
  2295. used to specify which is the source to delete
  2296. changes. It must be a changeset. In the case of a
  2297. changeset interval, the '--^interval-origin' must
  2298. be used to define the interval origin. To remove
  2299. a change, the system creates a new checked out
  2300. revision which will have the content of the
  2301. previous one except for the deleted changes.
  2302. --^mount The mount point for the given repository.
  2303. --^printcontributors Prints the contributors (base, source, and
  2304. destination).
  2305. --^noprintoperations Silently resolves merges without showing
  2306. information about the resolution.
  2307. --^silent Does not show any output.
  2308. --^to | --^destination Performs a merge-to operation to the specified
  2309. branch (by entering a branch spec or brspec)
  2310. with full conflict resolution.
  2311. A "merge-to" (or workspace-less merge) is a merge
  2312. done in the server side. While normal merges
  2313. happen on a workspace merging "from" a branch,
  2314. label or changeset, a merge-to happens entirely
  2315. on the server. While in normal merges the
  2316. "destination" is the workspace, in "merge-to" a
  2317. destination must be always specified (that's why
  2318. we call it "to").
  2319. Check the following link for more information
  2320. about the "merge to" feature:
  2321. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/mergeto
  2322. --^shelve Creates a shelve with the changes of the merge
  2323. result (plus merge traceability info) instead of
  2324. creating a new changeset. This option is not
  2325. available when the merge source is a shelve. This
  2326. option is only available for server-side-merge
  2327. (a.k.a. "merge-to"). Hence, the '--^to' and
  2328. '--^merge' options are required.
  2329. --^no-dst-changes Ensures that the destination contributor doesn't
  2330. have changes (the destination changeset is also
  2331. the common ancestor). When there are changes on
  2332. the destination, the merge is not allowed.
  2333. -^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset
  2334. created in the merge operation.
  2335. --^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
  2336. changeset created in the merge operation.
  2337. --^resolveconflict (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
  2338. Used to solve a directory conflict.
  2339. --^conflict Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, specifies
  2340. the index of the conflict to solve starting at 1.
  2341. --^resolutionoption Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, indicates
  2342. the type of the conflict resolution. Use one of
  2343. the following options: '^src', '^dst', '^rename'.
  2344. See Remarks for more info.
  2345. --^resolutioninfo Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, provides
  2346. the name to use when the '--^resolutionoption'
  2347. option is 'rename'.
  2348. --^mergeresultfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
  2349. into a file the information of the merge result
  2350. between different calls .The specified path will
  2351. be created during the first call and updated on
  2352. each next call.
  2353. --^solvedconflictsfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
  2354. into a file the information of the conflicts
  2355. solved between different calls. The specified
  2356. path will be created during the first call and
  2357. updated on each next call.
  2358. --^nointeractiveresolution (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
  2359. Avoids prompting the user for manual conflict.
  2360. This way, a directory conflict won't be solved.
  2361. --^machinereadable (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
  2362. Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  2363. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  2364. how the lines should start. (Default: empty string.)
  2365. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  2366. how the lines should end. (Default: empty string.)
  2367. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  2368. how the fields should be separated. (Default:
  2369. whitespace.)
  2370. == CMD_HELP_MERGE ==
  2371. Remarks:
  2372. This command is used to merge changes between two branches or between a
  2373. label and a branch. The destination of the merge must be always a branch.
  2374. The merge source is specified as an argument.
  2375. Destination is the current content of the workspace.
  2376. For example, to display the elements that will be merged from branch
  2377. task001 to the main branch, the selector must point to the main branch,
  2378. the workspace must be updated, and then:
  2379. cm ^merge ^br:/task001
  2380. To really perform the merge, '--^merge' option is added:
  2381. cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
  2382. To define the merge source, the following specs can be used:
  2383. - A branch specification (brspec):
  2384. [^br:/]br_name
  2385. Example: ^br:/main/task001
  2386. (The above performs a merge from the last changeset on this branch.)
  2387. - A label specification (lbspec):
  2388. ^lb:lb_name
  2389. Example: ^lb:BL001
  2390. (Merge from the labeled changeset.)
  2391. - A changeset specification (csetspec):
  2392. ^cs:cs_number
  2393. Example: ^cs:25
  2394. (Merge from the given changeset content.)
  2395. - A shelve specification (shspec):
  2396. ^sh:shelve_number
  2397. Example: ^sh:2
  2398. (Merge from the given shelve content.)
  2399. To automatically resolve directory conflicts, use '--^automaticresolution'
  2400. option and specify the type of conflict followed by the contributor
  2401. (source or destination) that must be selected during the merge operation.
  2402. (Separate each "type of conflict"-"contributor" pair by a semicolon (;).)
  2403. For example:
  2404. cm ^merge ^cs:2634 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^eviltwin-src;^changedelete-src
  2405. (The merge operation from changeset 2634 resolves the "^eviltwin" and
  2406. "^changedelete" conflicts by keeping the source ("-^src") contributor in
  2407. both cases.)
  2408. - A "-^src" suffix after a conflict type tells the merge command to keep the
  2409. source contributor changes.
  2410. - A "-^dst" suffix will keep the destination contributor changes.
  2411. This is the list of conflict types the merge command supports:
  2412. "^movedeviltwin", "^eviltwin", "^changedelete", "^deletechange", "^movedelete",
  2413. "^deletemove", "^loadedtwice", "^addmove", "^moveadd", "^divergentmove",
  2414. "^cyclemove", "^all".
  2415. The "^all" value overrides the other options. In the following example,
  2416. "^eviltwin-dst" will be ignored:
  2417. cm ^merge ^br:/main/task062 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^all-src;^eviltwin-dst
  2418. Check the following link to learn more about merge conflicts:
  2419. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/directorymerges
  2420. These are the options for '--^mergetype':
  2421. ^onlyone Automatic merge if only one contributor modified the
  2422. item.
  2423. ^onlysrc Automatic merge if only source contributor modified the
  2424. item.
  2425. ^onlydst Automatic merge if only destination contributor modified
  2426. the item.
  2427. ^try Automatic merge if only one contributor has modified the
  2428. conflictive piece of code (each conflict).
  2429. ^forced Always try to solve all non-automatic conflicts.
  2430. These are the options that are mainly used by plugins and integrations:
  2431. - '--^resolveconflict' to solve a directory conflict. You also have to
  2432. use the following options:
  2433. - '--^conflict' is the index of the conflict that you want to
  2434. solve, starting at 1.
  2435. - '--^resolutionoption' indicates the conflict resolution to
  2436. use. This can be:
  2437. - '^src' to keep the source change and discard the
  2438. destination change
  2439. - '^dst' to keep the destination change and discard the
  2440. source change
  2441. - '^rename' (only if the conflict type supports this
  2442. resolution), to rename the destination to the given name
  2443. provided with the '--^resolutioninfo' option.
  2444. - '--^resolutioninfo' to provide the name to use on a
  2445. '^rename' resolution
  2446. - '--^mergeresultfile' and '--^solvedconflictsfile', both used to
  2447. store the merge info between different calls.
  2448. - '--^nointeractiveresolution' indicates the merge to not ask the user for
  2449. manual conflict resolution.
  2450. - '--^machinereadable' and '--^startlineseparator', '--^endlineseparator',
  2451. '--^fieldseparator' options to print the output on a machine-readable
  2452. way (easier-to-parse).
  2453. Example:
  2454. cm ^merge --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=start@_@line \
  2455. --^endlineseparator=new@_@line --^fieldseparator=def#_#sep \
  2456. --^mergeresultfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6C.tmp \
  2457. --^solvedconflictsfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6D.tmp \
  2458. --^resolveconflict --^conflict=1 --^resolutionoption=rename \
  2459. --^resolutioninfo=bin_dst ^br:/main/task --^merge
  2460. Examples:
  2461. cm ^merge ^br:/task001
  2462. (Does not merge, just prints items to be merged.)
  2463. cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
  2464. (Does merge from branch 'task001'.)
  2465. cm ^merge ^cs:5 --^merge --^cherrypicking --^interval-origin=^cs:2
  2466. (Cherrypick from the changeset interval (2,5].)
  2467. cm ^merge ^cs:8 --^merge --^subtractive --^keepdestination
  2468. (Subtractive merge from changeset 8, keeping destination changes for those
  2469. elements with conflicts.)
  2470. cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge -^c="Integrated new UI"
  2471. (Does server-side merge, a.k.a. merge-to, from branch 'task001' to branch
  2472. 'main' and sets a comment.)
  2473. cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^shelve
  2474. (Does server-side merge from branch 'task001' to branch 'main' and leaves
  2475. the result on a shelve.)
  2476. cm ^merge ^sh:2 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^no-dst-changes
  2477. (Applies the shelve 2 into 'main' only if it was created from the current
  2478. 'main' head')
  2479. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
  2480. Creates a new attribute.
  2481. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
  2482. Usage:
  2483. cm ^attribute | ^att ^create | ^mk <att_name>
  2484. att_name Attribute name
  2485. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
  2486. Examples:
  2487. cm ^attribute ^create status
  2488. (Creates the attribute 'status'.)
  2489. cm ^att ^mk integrated
  2490. (Creates the attribute 'integrated'.)
  2491. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH ==
  2492. Allows the user to manage branches.
  2493. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH ==
  2494. Usage:
  2495. cm ^branch | ^br <command> [options]
  2496. Commands:
  2497. ^create | ^mk
  2498. ^delete | ^rm
  2499. ^rename
  2500. ^history
  2501. ^showmain
  2502. ^showmerges
  2503. To get more information about each command run:
  2504. cm ^branch <command> --^usage
  2505. cm ^branch <command> --^help
  2506. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH ==
  2507. Examples:
  2508. cm ^branch /main/scm21345
  2509. cm ^branch ^create /main/scm21345
  2510. cm ^branch ^delete /main/scm21345
  2511. cm ^branch ^rename /main/scm21345 scm21346
  2512. cm ^branch ^history /main/scm21345
  2513. cm ^branch ^showmain
  2514. cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
  2515. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_CREATE ==
  2516. Creates a new branch.
  2517. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_CREATE ==
  2518. Usage:
  2519. cm ^branch | ^br [^create | ^mk] <brspec>
  2520. [--^changeset=<csetspec> | --^label=<lbspec>]
  2521. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  2522. brspec The new branch name or spec.
  2523. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  2524. Options:
  2525. --^changeset Changeset used as starting point for the new branch.
  2526. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about cset specs.)
  2527. --^label Label used as starting point for the new branch.
  2528. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
  2529. -^c Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
  2530. specified text.
  2531. -^commentsfile Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
  2532. contents of the specified file.
  2533. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_CREATE ==
  2534. Remarks:
  2535. To create a top-level branch, specify the name without any hierarchy.
  2536. For example:
  2537. cm ^br /dev
  2538. If no optional parameter '--^changeset' is specified, the base of the new
  2539. branch will be the last changeset on the parent branch. If the new branch
  2540. is a top-level branch, the base changeset used will be cset 0.
  2541. You can specify a comment using either the '-^c' or the '-^m' switches:
  2542. cm ^branch /main/task001 -^c="This is the comment"
  2543. cm ^branch /main/task001 -^m "This is the comment"
  2544. Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
  2545. entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
  2546. the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
  2547. you to specify the comment.
  2548. Examples:
  2549. cm ^branch task001
  2550. cm ^branch ^create task001
  2551. cm ^branch ^mk task001
  2552. cm ^br ^mk task001
  2553. (Creates a top-level 'task001' branch in the repository of the current
  2554. workspace.)
  2555. cm ^branch ^br:/task001/task002@
  2556. (Creates 'task002' branch as child of 'task001'.)
  2557. cm ^br /main/task001@myrep@myserver:8084 -^c="my comment"
  2558. (Creates 'task001' branch as child of 'main' in repository
  2559. 'myrep@myserver:8084' with comment 'my comment'.)
  2560. cm ^branch ^br:/main/task001 --^changeset=2837 -^commentsfile=commenttask001.txt
  2561. (Creates the 'task001' branch as child of 'main' with base 'changeset=2837',
  2562. and applies the comment in 'commenttask001.txt' file.)
  2563. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_DELETE ==
  2564. Deletes one or more branches.
  2565. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_DELETE ==
  2566. Usage:
  2567. cm ^branch | ^br ^delete | ^rm <brspec>[ ...]
  2568. brspec Branch to delete. Use a whitespace to separate branches.
  2569. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
  2570. specs.)
  2571. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_DELETE ==
  2572. Remarks:
  2573. This command deletes one or more branches.
  2574. Examples:
  2575. cm ^branch ^delete /main/task001
  2576. (Deletes the branch with name 'task001' that is a child of 'main' in the
  2577. repository of the current workspace.)
  2578. cm ^br ^rm main/task002 /main/task012@reptest@myserver:8084
  2579. (Deletes branches '/main/task002' in the repository of the current workspace
  2580. and '/main/task012' in the repository 'reptest@myserver:8084'.)
  2581. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_RENAME ==
  2582. Renames a branch.
  2583. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_RENAME ==
  2584. Usage:
  2585. cm ^branch | ^br ^rename <brspec> <new_name>
  2586. brspec Branch to rename.
  2587. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  2588. new_name New name for the branch.
  2589. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_RENAME ==
  2590. Remarks:
  2591. This command renames a branch.
  2592. Examples:
  2593. cm ^branch ^rename /main/task0 task1
  2594. (Renames branch '/main/task0' to '/main/task1'.)
  2595. cm ^br ^rename ^br:/main@reptest@server2:8084 secondary
  2596. (Renames the 'main' branch of repository 'reptest' to 'secondary'.)
  2597. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
  2598. Shows the history of a branch.
  2599. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
  2600. Usage:
  2601. cm ^branch | ^br ^history <brspec> [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  2602. [--^machinereadable]
  2603. brspec The branch specification to obtain the history.
  2604. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  2605. Options:
  2606. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  2607. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  2608. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
  2609. Examples:
  2610. cm ^branch ^history ^br:/main/scm001@myrepository@myserver:8084
  2611. (Displays the history of '/main/scm001' branch of 'myrepository' repository
  2612. on 'myserver' server.)
  2613. cm ^br ^history main --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^machinereadable
  2614. (Displays the history of the 'main' branch of the current repository,
  2615. with a given date format, and in an easy-to-parse format.)
  2616. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
  2617. Shows the main branch of a repository.
  2618. This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
  2619. Most likely, the main branch of your repository is '/main'.
  2620. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
  2621. Usage:
  2622. cm ^branch | ^br ^showmain [<repspec>] [--^encoding=<name>]
  2623. [--^format=<format_str>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  2624. repspec The repository specification where to show the main
  2625. branch.
  2626. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
  2627. Options:
  2628. --^encoding Specifies the encoding to use in the output,
  2629. i.e.: utf-8.
  2630. See the MSDN documentation at
  2631. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  2632. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  2633. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  2634. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2635. Remarks for more info.
  2636. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  2637. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
  2638. Remarks:
  2639. This command shows the main branch of a repository.
  2640. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2641. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2642. {^id} Branch id.
  2643. {^comment} Comment.
  2644. {^date} Date.
  2645. {^name} Name.
  2646. {^owner} Owner.
  2647. {^parent} Parent branch name.
  2648. {^repository} Repository.
  2649. {^repname} Repository name.
  2650. {^repserver} Server.
  2651. {^changeset} Head changeset of the branch.
  2652. Examples:
  2653. cm ^branch ^showmain
  2654. (Displays the main branch for the repository of the current workspace.)
  2655. cm ^branch ^showmain repo@server:8084
  2656. (Displays the main branch for the repository 'repo' in server
  2657. 'server:8084'.)
  2658. cm ^br ^showmain --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^encoding=utf8
  2659. (Displays the main branch of the repository with a given date format,
  2660. and the output is in utf8.)
  2661. cm ^br ^showmain --^format="{^id} - {^name}"
  2662. (Displays the main branch of the repository, printing only its id and name.)
  2663. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
  2664. Shows branches pending to be merged.
  2665. == CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
  2666. This is an automation command, meant to be used to automate 'cm' only.
  2667. It is not as user friendly as it should be.
  2668. Usage:
  2669. cm ^branch | ^br ^showmerges <item_path>[ ...]
  2670. [--^format=<format_str>]
  2671. [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
  2672. Options:
  2673. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2674. Remarks for more info.
  2675. --^dateformat Format used to output dates.
  2676. == CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
  2677. Remarks:
  2678. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2679. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2680. {^id} Branch id.
  2681. {^comment} Comment.
  2682. {^date} Date.
  2683. {^name} Name.
  2684. {^owner} Owner.
  2685. {^parent} Parent branch name.
  2686. {^parentid} Parent branch id.
  2687. {^repid} Repository id.
  2688. {^repository} Repository.
  2689. {^repname} Repository name.
  2690. {^repserver} Repository server.
  2691. Examples:
  2692. cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
  2693. (Displays branches involved in the pending merge of 'file.txt'.)
  2694. cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt --^format="{^date} {^name}" --^dateformat="ddMMyy"
  2695. (Displays branches involved in the merge, printing only the date and the
  2696. name, with a given date format.)
  2697. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY ==
  2698. Allows the user to manage repositories.
  2699. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY ==
  2700. Usage:
  2701. cm ^repository | ^repo <command> [options]
  2702. Commands:
  2703. ^create | ^mk
  2704. ^delete | ^rm
  2705. ^list | ^ls
  2706. ^rename
  2707. ^add
  2708. To get more information about each command run:
  2709. cm ^repository <command> --^usage
  2710. cm ^repository <command> --^help
  2711. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY ==
  2712. Examples:
  2713. cm ^repository
  2714. cm ^repository ^list
  2715. cm ^repository newrepo
  2716. cm ^repository ^create newrepo
  2717. cm ^repository ^rename oldname newname
  2718. cm ^repository ^add C:\repo\
  2719. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
  2720. Creates a repository on a server.
  2721. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
  2722. Usage:
  2723. cm ^repository | ^repo <rep_name>
  2724. cm ^repository | ^repo <repserverspec> <rep_name>[ ...]
  2725. cm ^repository | ^repo [^create | ^mk] <rep_name>
  2726. repserverspec Repository server specification.
  2727. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
  2728. specs.)
  2729. rep_name Name or names of the new repository or repositories.
  2730. Use a whitespace to separate repository names.
  2731. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
  2732. Examples:
  2733. cm ^repository MyRep
  2734. cm ^repo 192.168.1.140:8087 Rep01 Rep01/ModuleA Rep01/ModuleB
  2735. cm ^repo ^create Rep01
  2736. cm ^repo ^mk list
  2737. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
  2738. Deletes a repository from a server.
  2739. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
  2740. Usage:
  2741. cm ^repository | ^repo ^delete | ^rm <repspec>
  2742. Options:
  2743. repspec Repository specification.
  2744. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
  2745. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
  2746. Remarks:
  2747. Deletes a repository from the repository server.
  2748. The data is not removed from the database backend, but unplugged
  2749. so that it will not be accessible anymore.
  2750. (Data can be reconnected afterwards, see 'cm ^repository ^add'.)
  2751. Examples:
  2752. cm ^repository ^delete myrepository@^repserver:myserver:8084
  2753. cm ^repository ^rm myrepository@myserver:8084
  2754. cm ^repo ^rm myrepository
  2755. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
  2756. Lists the repositories on a server.
  2757. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
  2758. Usage:
  2759. cm ^repository | ^repo [^list | ^ls] [<repserverspec>] [--^format=<str_format>]
  2760. Options:
  2761. repserverspec Repository server specification.
  2762. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
  2763. specs.)
  2764. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2765. Remarks for more info.
  2766. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
  2767. Remarks:
  2768. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  2769. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  2770. {^repid} | {0} Repository identifier.
  2771. {^repname} | {1} Repository name.
  2772. {^repserver} | {2} Server name.
  2773. {^repowner} | {3} Repository owner.
  2774. {^repguid} | {4} Unique identifier of the repository.
  2775. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  2776. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  2777. If the format parameter value is '^TABLE', the output will be printed
  2778. using a table format with the {^repid}, {^repname} and {^repserver} fields.
  2779. Examples:
  2780. cm ^repository
  2781. (Lists all repositories.)
  2782. cm ^repository ^list localhost:8084 --^format="{1, -20} {3}"
  2783. (Writes the repository name in 20 spaces, aligned to left, then a blank,
  2784. and then the repository owner.)
  2785. cm ^repository ^ls localhost:8084 --^format="{^repname, -20} {^repowner}"
  2786. (Writes the same as the previous example.)
  2787. cm ^repo ^ls localhost:8084 --^format=^TABLE
  2788. (Writes the list of repositories using a table format with the following
  2789. fields: repository id, repository name, and repository server name.)
  2790. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
  2791. Renames a repository.
  2792. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
  2793. Usage:
  2794. cm ^repository | ^repo ^rename [<repspec>] <new_name>
  2795. repspec Repository to be renamed.
  2796. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  2797. specifications.)
  2798. new_name New name for the repository.
  2799. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
  2800. Remarks:
  2801. This command renames a repository.
  2802. If no repspec is specified, current repository will be assumed.
  2803. Examples:
  2804. cm ^repository ^rename development
  2805. (The current repository will be renamed to 'development'.)
  2806. cm ^repo ^rename ^rep:default@SERVER:8084 development
  2807. (The 'default' repository on 'SERVER' will be renamed to 'development'.)
  2808. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
  2809. Connects an existing repository by adding its database.
  2810. == CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
  2811. Usage:
  2812. cm ^repository | ^repo ^add <db_file> <rep_name> <repserverspec>
  2813. db_file The name of the database file on the database backend.
  2814. rep_name The name of the repository.
  2815. repserverspec The repository server specification.
  2816. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  2817. server specifications.)
  2818. == CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
  2819. Remarks:
  2820. Reconnects an existing repository database to the server.
  2821. Example: After using the 'cm ^repository ^delete' command, use the '^add'
  2822. command to move a repository from one server to another or to restore an
  2823. archived repository.
  2824. Examples:
  2825. cm ^repository ^add rep_27 myrepository myserver:8084
  2826. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
  2827. Creates a new trigger on a server.
  2828. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
  2829. Usage:
  2830. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^create | ^mk <subtype-type> <new_name> <script_path>
  2831. [--^position=<new_position>]
  2832. [--^filter=<str_filter>]
  2833. [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  2834. subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  2835. Type 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
  2836. types.
  2837. new_name Name of the new trigger.
  2838. script_path Disk path on the server where the script to execute is
  2839. located. If the command line starts with "^webtrigger ",
  2840. the trigger will be considered as a web trigger. See
  2841. Remarks for more information.
  2842. Options:
  2843. --^position New position of the specified trigger.
  2844. This position must not be in use by another trigger of
  2845. the same type.
  2846. --^filter Checks only items that matches the specified filter.
  2847. --^server Creates the trigger on the specified server.
  2848. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  2849. one configured on the client.
  2850. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  2851. server specifications.)
  2852. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
  2853. Remarks:
  2854. Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
  2855. as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
  2856. against the specified URI -where the request body contains a JSON
  2857. dictionary with the trigger environment variables- and a fixed INPUT key
  2858. pointing to an array of strings.
  2859. Examples:
  2860. cm ^trigger ^create ^after-setselector "BackupMgr" "/path/to/script" --^position=4
  2861. cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
  2862. cm ^tr ^mk ^after-mklabel Log "/path/to/script" --^filter="^rep:myRep,LB*"
  2863. (This trigger will be executed only if the label name starts with 'LB'
  2864. and it is being created in a repository called 'myRep'.)
  2865. cm ^tr ^mk ^after-checkin NotifyTeam "^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
  2866. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_MOVE ==
  2867. Moves or renames a file or directory.
  2868. == CMD_USAGE_MOVE ==
  2869. Usage:
  2870. cm ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
  2871. [--^errorformat=<str_format>]
  2872. src_path Source item path.
  2873. dst_path Destination item path.
  2874. Options:
  2875. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  2876. Remarks for more info.
  2877. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message in a specific format. See
  2878. Remarks for more info.
  2879. == CMD_HELP_MOVE ==
  2880. Remarks:
  2881. This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
  2882. Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
  2883. If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
  2884. directory. In the first case, the file is renamed; otherwise, the item
  2885. is moved.
  2886. If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
  2887. The item to move or rename must exist.
  2888. Format:
  2889. {0} Source path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
  2890. {1} Destination path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
  2891. Examples:
  2892. cm ^move file.txt file.old
  2893. (Renames the item.)
  2894. cm ^mv .\file.old .\oldFiles
  2895. (Moves 'file.old' to 'oldFiles'.)
  2896. cm ^move .\src .\src2
  2897. (Renames a directory.)
  2898. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL ==
  2899. Allows the user to manage labels.
  2900. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL ==
  2901. Usage:
  2902. cm ^label | ^lb <command> [options]
  2903. Commands:
  2904. ^create | ^mk
  2905. ^delete | ^rm
  2906. ^rename
  2907. To get more information about each command run:
  2908. cm ^label <command> --^usage
  2909. cm ^label <command> --^help
  2910. == CMD_HELP_LABEL ==
  2911. Examples:
  2912. cm ^label myNewLabel ^cs:42
  2913. ('^create' command is optional.)
  2914. cm ^label ^rename myNewLabel newLabelName
  2915. cm ^label ^delete newLabelName
  2916. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_CREATE ==
  2917. Applies a label to a changeset and creates the label if required.
  2918. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL_CREATE ==
  2919. Usage:
  2920. cm ^label [^create] <lbspec> [<csetspec> | <wk_path>]
  2921. [--^allxlinkedrepositories]
  2922. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  2923. lbspec The new label name.
  2924. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
  2925. specs.)
  2926. csetspec Name or full specification of the changeset to label.
  2927. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  2928. specs.)
  2929. wk_path Path of the workspace to label. (The changeset that the
  2930. workspace is pointing will be labeled.)
  2931. Options:
  2932. --^allxlinkedrepositories Creates the new label in all Xlinked repositories.
  2933. -^c Applies the specified comment to the new label.
  2934. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
  2935. new label.
  2936. == CMD_HELP_LABEL_CREATE ==
  2937. Remarks:
  2938. Set PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor to type the
  2939. comment.
  2940. Examples:
  2941. cm ^label ^create ^lb:BL001 ^cs:1203 -^commentsfile=commentlb001.txt
  2942. (Creates label 'BL001' attached to changeset 1203, and applies the comment
  2943. in the 'commentlb001.txt' file.)
  2944. cm ^label BL002 ^cs:1203 -^c="first release"
  2945. (Creates label 'BL002', with a comment, and attached to changeset 1203.)
  2946. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_DELETE ==
  2947. Deletes one or more labels.
  2948. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL_DELETE ==
  2949. Usage:
  2950. cm ^label ^delete <lbspec>[ ...]
  2951. lbspec Label to delete. Use a whitespace to separate labels.
  2952. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
  2953. specs.)
  2954. == CMD_HELP_LABEL_DELETE ==
  2955. Remarks:
  2956. This command deletes one or more labels.
  2957. Examples:
  2958. cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001
  2959. (Deletes the label 'BL001'.)
  2960. cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001 ^lb:BL002@reptest@server2:8084
  2961. (Deletes the labels 'BL001' and 'BL002'.)
  2962. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_RENAME ==
  2963. Renames a label.
  2964. == CMD_USAGE_LABEL_RENAME ==
  2965. Usage:
  2966. cm ^label ^rename <lbspec> <new_name>
  2967. lbspec Label to rename.
  2968. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
  2969. new_name New name for the label.
  2970. == CMD_HELP_LABEL_RENAME ==
  2971. Remarks:
  2972. This command renames a label.
  2973. Examples:
  2974. cm ^label ^rename ^lb:BL001 BL002
  2975. (Renames the label 'BL001' to 'BL002'.)
  2976. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_OBLITERATE ==
  2977. DEPRECATED
  2978. == CMD_USAGE_OBLITERATE ==
  2979. DEPRECATED.
  2980. == CMD_HELP_OBLITERATE ==
  2981. DEPRECATED.
  2982. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_OBJECTSPEC ==
  2983. Describes how to write object specs.
  2984. == CMD_USAGE_OBJECTSPEC ==
  2985. Usage:
  2986. cm ^objectspec
  2987. To get all the information about how to build object specs.
  2988. == CMD_HELP_OBJECTSPEC ==
  2989. Several Plastic SCM commands expect 'object specs' as input to refer to a
  2990. given object (typically a branch, changeset, repository, etc).
  2991. This documentation describes the different "specs" available and how to
  2992. build them.
  2993. Each spec type begins with a unique tag, for example "^rep:" or "^cs:". The tag
  2994. must be specified for commands that take a general object spec, for example
  2995. "cm ^setowner object_spec", but can often be omitted for commands that take only
  2996. a single type of spec, for example, "cm ^getfile revision_spec".
  2997. -- Repository server spec (repserverspec) --
  2998. ^repserver:name:port
  2999. Examples:
  3000. cm ^repo ^list ^repserver:skull:8084
  3001. cm ^repo ^list skull:8084
  3002. Side note:
  3003. We call it 'repository server spec', instead of just 'server spec' for
  3004. historical reasons. Long ago, we had separate workspace and repository
  3005. servers, and the naming survived.
  3006. -- Repository spec (repspec) --
  3007. ^rep:rep_name@[repserverspec]
  3008. Examples:
  3009. cm ^showowner ^rep:codice@localhost:6060
  3010. (Here the "^rep:" is required because ^showowner admits not only repos
  3011. but also other types of objects. So it needs the user to indicate the
  3012. object type.)
  3013. -- Branch spec (brspec) --
  3014. ^br:[/]br_name[@repspec]
  3015. Examples:
  3016. cm ^switch ^br:/main@^rep:plastic@^repserver:skull:9095
  3017. (In this case "^br:", "^rep" and "^repserver" are not needed, so the
  3018. command admits a much shorter form:
  3019. "cm ^switch main@plastic@skull:9095".)
  3020. cm ^find ^revisions "^where ^branch='^br:/main/task001'"
  3021. Remark:
  3022. The initial '/' on the branch is not mandatory. We used to specify all
  3023. our branches as /main, /main/task001, and so on. But now, we prefer the
  3024. shorter form main, main/task001 which makes commands more compact.
  3025. -- Changeset spec (csetspec) --
  3026. ^cs:cs_number|cs_guid[@repspec]
  3027. The number or GUID of the changeset can be specified.
  3028. Examples:
  3029. cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@code@skull:7070
  3030. -- Label spec (labelspec) --
  3031. ^lb:lb_name[@repspec]
  3032. Examples:
  3033. cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE2.0
  3034. cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE1.4@myrep@MYSERVER:8084
  3035. -- Revision spec --
  3036. There are different types of rev specs:
  3037. ^rev:item_path[#(brspec|csetspec|labelspec)]
  3038. ^rev:^serverpath:item_path#(brspec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
  3039. ^rev:^revid:rev_id[@rep_spec]
  3040. ^rev:^itemid:item_id#(br_spec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
  3041. Examples:
  3042. cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
  3043. cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
  3044. ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
  3045. cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
  3046. -- Item spec --
  3047. ^item:path
  3048. Rarely used.
  3049. Example:
  3050. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'"
  3051. -- Attribute spec --
  3052. ^att:att_name[@repspec]
  3053. Example:
  3054. cm ^attribute ^set ^att:merged@code@doe:8084 ^cs:25@code@doe:8084 done
  3055. -- Shelve spec --
  3056. ^sh:sh_number[@repspec]
  3057. Example:
  3058. cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
  3059. -- Workspace specs --
  3060. ^wk:name@clientmachine
  3061. Rarely used, since they only apply to workspace related commands. Useful to
  3062. specify the workspace by name and machine instead of path.
  3063. Examples:
  3064. cm ^showselector ^wk:codebase@modok
  3065. Side note:
  3066. These specs come from the old days of Plastic SCM 2.x where 'workspace
  3067. servers' existed as a way to store workspace metadata in a centralized
  3068. way. Were deprecated due to performance issues.
  3069. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL ==
  3070. Runs commands in a partial workspace.
  3071. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL ==
  3072. Usage:
  3073. cm ^partial <command> [options]
  3074. Commands:
  3075. ^configure
  3076. ^add
  3077. ^undo
  3078. ^co | ^checkout
  3079. ^unco | ^undocheckout
  3080. ^ci | ^checkin
  3081. ^mv | ^move
  3082. ^rm | ^remove
  3083. ^stb | ^switch
  3084. ^upd | ^update
  3085. To get more information about each command run:
  3086. cm ^partial <command> --^usage
  3087. cm ^partial <command> --^help
  3088. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL ==
  3089. Examples:
  3090. cm ^partial ^configure +/background-blue.png
  3091. cm ^partial ^update landscape-1024.png
  3092. cm ^partial ^checkin eyes-green.png eyes-black.png
  3093. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_ADD ==
  3094. Adds an item to version control.
  3095. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_ADD ==
  3096. Usage:
  3097. cm ^partial ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^parents]
  3098. [--^ignorefailed] [--^skipcontentcheck] <item_path>[ ...]
  3099. item_path Items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  3100. containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate paths.
  3101. Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
  3102. Options:
  3103. -^R Adds items recursively.
  3104. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3105. --^parents Includes the parent directories of the items specified
  3106. in the operation.
  3107. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
  3108. continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
  3109. added, its content is not added.
  3110. --^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
  3111. text or binary, it will be set as binary by default
  3112. instead of checking the content to detect the type.
  3113. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_ADD ==
  3114. Remarks:
  3115. Requirements to add items:
  3116. - The parent directory of the item to add must be previously added.
  3117. Examples:
  3118. cm ^partial ^add pic1.png pic2.png
  3119. (Adds 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' items.)
  3120. cm ^partial ^add c:\workspace\picture.png
  3121. (Adds 'picture.png' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
  3122. cm ^partial ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
  3123. (Recursively adds 'src'.)
  3124. cm ^partial ^add --^parents samples\design01.png
  3125. (Adds 'design01.png' file and 'samples' parent folder.)
  3126. cm ^partial ^add -^R *
  3127. (Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
  3128. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
  3129. Stores changes in the repository.
  3130. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
  3131. Usage:
  3132. cm ^partial ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
  3133. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  3134. [--^all | -^a] [--^applychanged] [--^keeplock]
  3135. [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
  3136. Options:
  3137. item_path Items to checkin. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3138. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3139. paths.
  3140. Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
  3141. -^c Specifies a comment to the changeset created in the
  3142. checkin operation.
  3143. -^commentsfile Applies the comment from the specified file to the
  3144. changeset created in the checkin operation.
  3145. --^all | -^a Includes also the items changed, moved, and deleted
  3146. locally on the specified paths.
  3147. --^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
  3148. detected in the workspace along with the checked out
  3149. items.
  3150. --^keeplock Keeps the lock of the locked items after the checkin
  3151. operation.
  3152. --^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not to
  3153. the target.
  3154. --^ignorefailed Any changes that cannot be applied (because the lock
  3155. - a.k.a. exclusive checkout - cannot be adquired or
  3156. because local changes are in conflict with the server
  3157. changes) are discarded and the checkin operation
  3158. continues without them.
  3159. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
  3160. Remarks:
  3161. - If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin will involve all the
  3162. pending changes in the workspace.
  3163. - The checkin operation always applies recursively from the given path.
  3164. - To checkin an item:
  3165. - The item must be under source code control.
  3166. - The item must be checked out.
  3167. - If the item is changed but not checked out, the '--^applychanged' flag
  3168. is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
  3169. wildcards ('*').
  3170. Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
  3171. checked in.
  3172. Set PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor to type the
  3173. comment.
  3174. Reading input from stdin:
  3175. The '^partial ^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  3176. single dash "-".
  3177. Example: cm ^partial ^checkin -
  3178. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  3179. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
  3180. Example:
  3181. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^partial ^checkin --^all -
  3182. (In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
  3183. Examples:
  3184. cm ^partial ^checkin figure.png landscape.png
  3185. (Applies the checkin to 'figure.png' and 'landscape.png' checked-out files.)
  3186. cm ^partial ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
  3187. (Applies checkin to current directory and sets the comment from the
  3188. 'mycomment.txt' file.)
  3189. cm ^partial ^ci background.png -^c="my comment" --^keeplock
  3190. (Applies the checkin to 'background.png', includes a comment, and keeps the
  3191. lock.)
  3192. cm ^partial ^checkin --^applychanged
  3193. (Applies the checkin to all pending changes in the workspace.)
  3194. cm ^partial ^checkin link --^symlink
  3195. (Applies the checkin to the link file and not to the target, available on
  3196. UNIX environments.)
  3197. cm ^partial ^checkin . --^ignorefailed
  3198. (Applies checkin to current directory, ignoring the changes that cannot be
  3199. applied.)
  3200. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
  3201. Marks files as ready to modify.
  3202. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
  3203. Usage:
  3204. cm ^partial ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
  3205. [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
  3206. Options:
  3207. item_path Items to checkout. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3208. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3209. paths.
  3210. Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
  3211. --^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
  3212. format.
  3213. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3214. --^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
  3215. cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
  3216. continue without it.
  3217. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
  3218. Remarks:
  3219. To checkout an item:
  3220. - The item must be under source code control.
  3221. - The item must be checked in.
  3222. If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
  3223. a checkout on a path happens, Plastic checks if it meets any of the rules
  3224. and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
  3225. simultaneously checkout.
  3226. You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
  3227. Check the Administrator Guide to learn how locking works:
  3228. https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/locking
  3229. Examples:
  3230. cm ^partial ^checkout pic1.png pic2.png
  3231. (Checkouts 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' files.)
  3232. cm ^partial ^co *.png
  3233. (Checkouts all png files.)
  3234. cm ^partial ^checkout .
  3235. (Checkouts current directory.)
  3236. cm ^partial ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
  3237. (Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
  3238. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
  3239. Allows you to configure your workspace by loading or unloading items from it.
  3240. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
  3241. Usage:
  3242. cm ^partial ^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
  3243. [--^ignorecase] [--^restorefulldirs]
  3244. path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ") to
  3245. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3246. paths.
  3247. Paths have to start with "/".
  3248. Options:
  3249. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3250. --^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the process. Incorrect paths
  3251. will not cause the command to stop.
  3252. --^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, '^configure'
  3253. will work for "/Data/Textures" even if the user writes
  3254. "/data/teXtures".
  3255. --^restorefulldirs Resets an invalid directory configuration (happens when
  3256. a non-partial operation is run on a partial workspace).
  3257. The directories in this list will be fully configured
  3258. (full check) which means they will automatically
  3259. download new content during the update.
  3260. This operation does not download any files, just
  3261. restores the directory configuration on partial
  3262. workspaces.
  3263. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
  3264. Remarks:
  3265. The command assumes recursive operation.
  3266. Examples:
  3267. cm ^partial ^configure +/landscape_grey.png
  3268. (Loads 'landscape_grey.png' item.)
  3269. cm ^partial ^configure -/landscape_black.png
  3270. (Unloads 'landscape_black.png' item.)
  3271. cm ^partial ^configure +/soft -/soft/soft-black.png
  3272. (Loads all 'soft' directory children items except 'soft-black.png'.)
  3273. cm ^partial ^configure -/
  3274. (Unloads the whole workspace.)
  3275. cm ^partial ^configure -/ +/
  3276. (Loads the whole workspace.)
  3277. cm ^partial ^configure -/figure-64.png --^ignorefailed
  3278. (Unloads 'figure-64.png' item even if it was already unloaded.)
  3279. cm ^partial ^configure +/ --^restorefulldirs
  3280. (Sets all directories to automatically download the new content.)
  3281. cm ^partial ^configure +/src/lib --^restorefulldirs
  3282. (Sets only '/src/lib' and its subdirectories to automatically download the
  3283. new content.)
  3284. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
  3285. Moves or renames a file or directory.
  3286. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
  3287. Usage:
  3288. cm ^partial ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
  3289. src_path Source item path.
  3290. dst_path Destination item path.
  3291. Options:
  3292. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  3293. Remarks for more info.
  3294. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
  3295. Remarks:
  3296. This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
  3297. Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
  3298. If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
  3299. directory. In the first case, the file will be renamed; otherwise, the item
  3300. will be moved.
  3301. If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
  3302. The item to move or rename must exist.
  3303. Format:
  3304. {0} Source path.
  3305. {1} Destination path.
  3306. Examples:
  3307. cm ^partial ^move file.png file-blue.png
  3308. (Renames the item.)
  3309. cm ^partial ^mv .\file-blue.png .\blueFiles
  3310. (Moves 'file-blue.png' to 'blueFiles'.)
  3311. cm ^partial ^move .\design .\marketing
  3312. (Renames a directory.)
  3313. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_RM ==
  3314. Deletes a file or directory from version control.
  3315. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_RM ==
  3316. Usage:
  3317. cm ^partial ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^nodisk]
  3318. item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to
  3319. specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3320. paths.
  3321. Options:
  3322. --^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on disk.
  3323. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_RM ==
  3324. Remarks:
  3325. Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
  3326. directory in the source code control.
  3327. Requirements:
  3328. - The item must be under source code control.
  3329. Examples:
  3330. cm ^partial ^remove src
  3331. (Removes 'src'. If 'src' is a directory, this is the same that:
  3332. cm ^partial ^remove -^R src.)
  3333. cm ^partial ^remove c:\workspace\pic01.png --^nodisk
  3334. (Removes 'pic01.png' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
  3335. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
  3336. Sets a branch as the working branch.
  3337. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
  3338. Usage:
  3339. cm ^switch <branch_spec> [--^report | --^silent] [--^workspace=<path>]
  3340. (Sets the working branch and updates the workspace.)
  3341. cm ^switch <branch_spec> --^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent]
  3342. [--^ignorefailed] [--^ignorecase] [--^workspace=<path>]
  3343. (Sets the working branch and runs a workspace configuration like the 'cm
  3344. ^partial ^configure' command does.)
  3345. branch_spec Branch specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  3346. more about branch specs.)
  3347. path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ")
  3348. to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  3349. separate paths. Paths must start with "/".
  3350. Options:
  3351. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3352. --^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
  3353. is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
  3354. This option only works when the '--^configure' option
  3355. is not specified.
  3356. --^configure Configures (loads / unloads items) the workspace
  3357. after updating the working branch. Check 'cm ^partial
  3358. ^configure --^help' to learn how to specify the paths
  3359. to configure.
  3360. --^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the configuration process.
  3361. Incorrect paths will not cause the command to stop.
  3362. --^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, option
  3363. '--^configure' works for "/Data/Textures" even if the user
  3364. writes "/data/teXtures".
  3365. --^workspace=path Path where the workspace is located.
  3366. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
  3367. Remarks:
  3368. This command allows users to update the working branch. After updating the
  3369. branch, the command updates the workspace to the new branch as the
  3370. 'cm ^partial ^update' command would do. However, if the '--^configure' option is
  3371. specified, the command allows to configure the workspace using the new
  3372. branch configuration as the 'cm ^partial ^configure' command would do.
  3373. Examples:
  3374. cm ^switch ^br:/main/task
  3375. (Sets /main/task as working branch and updates the workspace.)
  3376. cm ^switch ^br:/main/task --^configure +/art/images
  3377. (Sets /main/task as working branch and configures the workspace to
  3378. load the /art/images folder.)
  3379. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNCO ==
  3380. Undoes the checkout on an item.
  3381. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNCO ==
  3382. Usage:
  3383. cm ^partial ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [--^silent]
  3384. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use double quotes (" ")
  3385. to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  3386. separate paths.
  3387. Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
  3388. Options:
  3389. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3390. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNCO ==
  3391. Remarks:
  3392. If an item is checked-out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
  3393. the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
  3394. out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
  3395. Requirements:
  3396. - The item must be under source code control.
  3397. - The item must be checked out.
  3398. Examples:
  3399. cm ^partial ^undocheckout .
  3400. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
  3401. cm ^partial ^undocheckout pic1.png pic2.png
  3402. cm ^unco c:\workspace\design01.png
  3403. (Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
  3404. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
  3405. Undoes changes in a workspace.
  3406. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
  3407. Usage:
  3408. cm ^partial ^undo [<path>[ ...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive]
  3409. [<filter>[ ...]]
  3410. [--^silent | --^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  3411. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  3412. path Path of the files or directories to apply the
  3413. operation to. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3414. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
  3415. separate paths.
  3416. If no path is specified, by default the undo
  3417. operation will take all of the files in the current
  3418. directory.
  3419. filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given
  3420. paths. Use a whitespace to separate filters. See the
  3421. Filters section for more information.
  3422. Options:
  3423. --^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
  3424. to the target.
  3425. -^r Executes the undo recursively.
  3426. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3427. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  3428. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  3429. how the lines should start.
  3430. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  3431. how the lines should end.
  3432. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  3433. how the fields should be separated.
  3434. Filters:
  3435. If no flag is specified, by default, all changes are undone, but the
  3436. paths can be filtered using one or more of the flags below.
  3437. If a file or directory matches one or more of the specified kinds of change,
  3438. all of the changes on said file or directory will be undone.
  3439. For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file is
  3440. both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
  3441. --^checkedout Select checked-out files and directories.
  3442. --^unchanged Select files whose content is unchanged.
  3443. --^changed Select locally changed or checked-out files and
  3444. directories.
  3445. --^deleted Select deleted files and directories.
  3446. --^moved Select moved files and directories.
  3447. --^added Select added files and directories.
  3448. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
  3449. Remarks:
  3450. The ^undo command is dangerous - it undoes work in an irreversible way.
  3451. Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous state
  3452. of the files and directories affected by it. If no path is specified
  3453. in the arguments, by default it will undo every change in the current
  3454. directory, but not recursively.
  3455. These are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
  3456. /src
  3457. |- file.txt
  3458. |- code.cs
  3459. \- /test
  3460. |- test_a.py
  3461. \- test_b.py
  3462. cm ^partial ^undo
  3463. cm ^partial ^undo *
  3464. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
  3465. cm ^partial ^undo .
  3466. cm ^partial ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
  3467. If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
  3468. To undo all of the changes below a directory (including changes affecting
  3469. the directory itself):
  3470. cm ^partial ^undo dirpath -^r
  3471. If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
  3472. undone.
  3473. Examples:
  3474. cm ^partial ^undo . -^r
  3475. (Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
  3476. from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
  3477. cm ^partial ^co file.txt
  3478. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
  3479. (Undoes the checkout on file.txt.)
  3480. ^echo ^content >> file.txt
  3481. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
  3482. (Undoes the local change to file.txt.)
  3483. cm ^partial ^undo src
  3484. (Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
  3485. cm ^partial ^undo src/*
  3486. (Undo changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
  3487. affecting src.)
  3488. cm ^partial ^undo *.cs
  3489. (Undo changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  3490. directory.)
  3491. cm ^partial ^undo *.cs -^r
  3492. (Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  3493. directory and every directory below it.)
  3494. cm ^partial ^co file1.txt file2.txt
  3495. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  3496. cm ^partial ^undo --^unchanged
  3497. (Undoes the checkout of unchanged file2.txt, ignoring locally changed
  3498. file1.txt.)
  3499. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  3500. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  3501. cm ^partial ^co file1.txt
  3502. cm ^partial ^undo --^checkedout
  3503. (Undoes the changes in checked-out file file1.txt, ignoring file2.txt as it is
  3504. not checked-out.)
  3505. cm ^partial ^add file.txt
  3506. cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
  3507. (Undoes the add of file.txt, making it once again a private file.)
  3508. ^rm file1.txt
  3509. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  3510. cm ^partial ^add file3.txt
  3511. cm ^partial ^undo --^deleted --^added *
  3512. (Undoes the file1.txt delete and file3.txt add, ignoring the file2.txt
  3513. change.)
  3514. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
  3515. Updates the partial workspace and downloads latest changes.
  3516. == CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
  3517. Usage:
  3518. cm ^partial ^update [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^changeset=<number>]
  3519. [--^silent | --^report] [--^dontmerge]
  3520. item_path Items to be updated. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  3521. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  3522. paths.
  3523. Use . to apply update to current directory.
  3524. If no path is specified, then the current partial
  3525. workspace is fully updated.
  3526. Options:
  3527. --^changeset Updates the partial workspace to a specific changeset.
  3528. --^silent Does not show any output.
  3529. --^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
  3530. is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
  3531. --^dontmerge Does not merge the file conflicts, it just skips them.
  3532. The other changes are properly applied. This option can
  3533. be useful for automation to avoid user interaction.
  3534. == CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
  3535. Remarks:
  3536. The '^partial ^update' command updates the out-of-date files.
  3537. The command assumes recursive operation.
  3538. If all the specified paths are files inside the same Xlink when using the
  3539. '--^changeset' option, then the versions to download are searched in the
  3540. specified changeset of the Xlinked repository.
  3541. Examples:
  3542. cm ^partial ^update
  3543. (Updates all in the current partial workspace.)
  3544. cm ^partial ^update .
  3545. (Updates all current directory children items.)
  3546. cm ^partial ^update backgroud-blue.png
  3547. (Updates 'backgroud-blue.png' item.)
  3548. cm ^partial ^update soft_black.png soft-grey.png
  3549. (Updates 'soft_black.png' and 'soft-grey.png' items.)
  3550. cm ^partial ^update src --^report
  3551. (Updates all 'src' directory children items, printing the applied changes
  3552. list at the end.)
  3553. cm ^partial ^update src --^changeset=4
  3554. (Updates all 'src' directory children items to the content they loaded
  3555. in the changeset 4.)
  3556. cm ^partial ^update xlink/first.png --^changeset=4
  3557. (Updates 'xlink/first.png' item to the content it loaded in the changeset 4
  3558. of the Xlinked repository.)
  3559. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PATCH ==
  3560. Generates a patch file from a spec or applies a generated patch to the current
  3561. workspace.
  3562. == CMD_USAGE_PATCH ==
  3563. Usage:
  3564. cm ^patch <source_spec> [<source_spec>] [--^output=<output_file>]
  3565. [--^tool=<path_to_diff>]
  3566. Generates a patch file that contains the differences of a branch,
  3567. a changeset, or the differences between changesets. It also tracks
  3568. differences of text and binary files.
  3569. cm ^patch --^apply <patch_file> [--^tool=<path_to_patch>]
  3570. Allows to apply the contents of a generated patch file in the current
  3571. workspace.
  3572. source_spec Full spec of a changeset or a branch. (Use
  3573. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  3574. output_file File to save the patch content. It no file is specified,
  3575. the patch content will be printed on standard output.
  3576. patch_file Patch file to apply in the current workspace.
  3577. Options:
  3578. --^output Sets the output file of the patch command.
  3579. --^tool Sets the application to use (diff or patch).
  3580. == CMD_HELP_PATCH ==
  3581. Limitations:
  3582. If the output patch file already exists, the command will not overwrite it.
  3583. When applying a patch, the command will not apply changes to modified files
  3584. if they are not present on disk.
  3585. Important:
  3586. This command requires Diff and Patch tools, publicly available at
  3587. http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/patch.htm and
  3588. http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/diffutils.htm
  3589. Once installed, it's recommended to add their location to the PATH
  3590. environment variable.
  3591. Examples:
  3592. cm ^patch ^cs:4@default@localhost:8084
  3593. (Prints on console the differences of cset 4 in unified format.)
  3594. cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch
  3595. (Generates a patch file with the differences of branch "main".)
  3596. cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\diff.exe
  3597. (Same as above, using a custom exe.)
  3598. cm ^patch ^cs:2@default ^cs:4@default
  3599. (Prints on console the differences between csets 2 and 4 in unified format.)
  3600. cm ^patch --^apply file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\patch.exe
  3601. (Applies the patch in 'file.patch' to the local workspace with a custom exe.)
  3602. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_QUERY ==
  3603. Executes SQL queries. Requires SQL storage.
  3604. == CMD_USAGE_QUERY ==
  3605. Usage:
  3606. cm ^query <sql_command> [--^outputfile=<output_file>]
  3607. [--^solveuser=<column_name>[,...]]
  3608. [--^solvepath=<column_name>[,...]]
  3609. [--^columnwidth=<value>] [--^nocolumnname]
  3610. [--^columnseparator=<sep>] [--^repository=<name>]
  3611. sql_command The sql query to be executed.
  3612. Options:
  3613. --^outputfile Writes the result in an output file.
  3614. --^solveuser Sets the specified columns as username columns. The
  3615. query interpreter will assume that data of these columns
  3616. will be users, and will try to solve them.
  3617. --^solvepath Sets the specified columns as itemid column. The query
  3618. interpreter will try to solve item id to filesystem
  3619. paths.
  3620. --^columnwidth Specifies the width of each column to format the output.
  3621. --^nocolumnname Does not print column name.
  3622. --^columnseparator Uses char as column separator instead of a tab (\t).
  3623. --^repository Repository to query.
  3624. == CMD_HELP_QUERY ==
  3625. Remarks:
  3626. This command allows users to execute SQL queries in the server database.
  3627. In order to write SQL queries, use these two pre-defined functions to manage
  3628. users and paths:
  3629. - '^SolveUser(<username>)' that resolves a username into Plastic SCM format.
  3630. - '^SolvePath(<path>)' that resolves a disk path into an item id.
  3631. Also, you can use options to show query results in a human readable form.
  3632. You can use the options '--^solveuser=<column_name>' and
  3633. '--^solvepath=<column_name>' to specify columns that query interpreter
  3634. must convert to a legible text. You can specify more than one column name,
  3635. comma separated.
  3636. Examples:
  3637. cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision" --^columnwidth=25 --^repository=reptest
  3638. (Retrieves data from 'revision' table from repository 'reptest'.)
  3639. cm ^query "^SELECT b.^sname ^as br_name, o.^dtimestamp ^as date ^from ^branch b, \
  3640. ^object o, ^seid s ^where b.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and \
  3641. s.^scode='^SolveUser(john)'" --^outputfile=query.txt
  3642. (Outputs into a file the branches with owner 'john'.)
  3643. cm ^query "^select r.^iobjid, r.^fiditem ^as path, s.^scode ^as username ^FROM \
  3644. ^revision r, ^object o, ^seid s ^WHERE r.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and \
  3645. o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and o.^dtimestamp>04/25/2014" \
  3646. --^solveuser=username --^solvepath=path --^repository=reptest@server2:9095
  3647. (Retrieves selected data from selected repository.)
  3648. cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision ^WHERE ^fiditem=^SolvePath(c:\mywkpath\info)"
  3649. (Retrieves all revision data of path 'info'.)
  3650. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
  3651. Deletes one or more attributes.
  3652. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
  3653. Usage:
  3654. cm ^attribute | ^att ^delete | ^rm <att_spec>[ ...]
  3655. att_spec Attributes to delete. Use a whitespace to separate
  3656. attributes.
  3657. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about attribute
  3658. specs.)
  3659. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
  3660. Remarks:
  3661. This command removes one or more attributes.
  3662. Examples:
  3663. cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
  3664. (Deletes the attribute 'status'.)
  3665. cm ^att ^rm status ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084
  3666. (Deletes the attributes 'status' and 'integrated'.)
  3667. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
  3668. Unsets an object's attribute.
  3669. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
  3670. Usage:
  3671. cm ^attribute | ^att ^unset <att_spec> <object_spec>
  3672. att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  3673. learn more about attribute specs.)
  3674. object_spec Specification of the object to remove the attribute
  3675. from. Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
  3676. shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
  3677. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  3678. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
  3679. Remarks:
  3680. The command unsets an attribute that was previously set on an object. It
  3681. does not delete the attribute object itself.
  3682. Examples:
  3683. cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
  3684. (Removes attribute realization 'status' from branch 'main/SCM105'.)
  3685. cm ^att ^unset ^att:integrated@reptest@localhost:8084 ^cs:25@reptest@localhost:8084
  3686. (Removes attribute realization 'integrated' from changeset 25, all in
  3687. repository 'reptest'.)
  3688. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
  3689. Renames an attribute.
  3690. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
  3691. Usage:
  3692. cm ^attribute | ^att ^rename <att_spec> <new_name>
  3693. att_spec Attribute to rename. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
  3694. more about attribute specs.)
  3695. new_name New name for the attribute.
  3696. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
  3697. Remarks:
  3698. This command renames an attribute.
  3699. Examples:
  3700. cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status state
  3701. (Renames the attribute 'status' to 'state'.)
  3702. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
  3703. Edits the comment of an attribute.
  3704. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
  3705. Usage:
  3706. cm ^attribute | ^att ^edit <att_spec> <new_comment>
  3707. att_spec Attribute to change its comment. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  3708. to learn more about attribute specs.)
  3709. new_comment New comment for the attribute. You can also specify a
  3710. default list of values for the attribute.
  3711. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
  3712. Remarks:
  3713. This command changes the comment of an attribute.
  3714. To specify a default list of values for the attribute, you just need to
  3715. include a line like the following in the attribute comment:
  3716. 'default: value_one, "value two", value3, "Final value"'.
  3717. Examples:
  3718. cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "The status of a branch in the CI pipeline."
  3719. (Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'.)
  3720. cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of a branch. default: open, resolved, reviewed"
  3721. (Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'. And also specifies a list of
  3722. values. So when you set the attribute 'status' to an object, you can select
  3723. one of the following values: "open", "resolved", or "reviewed".)
  3724. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPLICATE ==
  3725. WARNING: This command is deprecated.
  3726. Use 'cm ^pull' (equivalent to '^replicate') and 'cm ^push' (equivalent to
  3727. '^replicate --^push').
  3728. == CMD_USAGE_REPLICATE ==
  3729. == CMD_HELP_REPLICATE ==
  3730. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PULL ==
  3731. Pulls a branch from another repo.
  3732. == CMD_USAGE_PULL ==
  3733. Usage:
  3734. cm ^pull <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
  3735. [--^preview] [--^nodata] [TranslateOptions]
  3736. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  3737. (Direct server-to-server replication. Pulls a branch from a repository.)
  3738. cm ^pull <dst_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
  3739. (Package based replication. Imports the package in the destination repository.)
  3740. cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_br_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
  3741. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  3742. (Introduces the missing data for all the changesets of a branch previously
  3743. replicated with '--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified,
  3744. Plastic tries to use the "replication source" (origin of the replicated
  3745. branch)).
  3746. cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_cs_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
  3747. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  3748. (Introduces the missing data for a changeset previously replicated with
  3749. '--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified, Plastic tries to
  3750. use the "replication source").
  3751. src_br_spec The branch to pull from a remote repository.
  3752. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  3753. dst_br_spec The branch to hydrate.
  3754. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  3755. dst_cs_spec The changeset to hydrate.
  3756. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  3757. specs.)
  3758. dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
  3759. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  3760. specs.)
  3761. --^package Specifies the previously created package file to import
  3762. for package based replication.
  3763. Useful to move data between servers when there is no
  3764. direct network connection.
  3765. Refer to 'cm ^push' to create a package file.
  3766. Options:
  3767. --^preview Gives information about what changes will be pulled but
  3768. no changes are actually performed. This option is useful
  3769. to check the data that will be transferred before
  3770. replicating changes.
  3771. --^nodata Replicates the branch changes without replicating the
  3772. data. This option is not allowed with package
  3773. replication.
  3774. TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
  3775. --^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
  3776. different in source and destination and there is not a
  3777. profile to authenticate to destination.
  3778. AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more
  3779. information.
  3780. Translate options:
  3781. --^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
  3782. The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
  3783. modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
  3784. the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
  3785. values:
  3786. ^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
  3787. ^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
  3788. ^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
  3789. (see below).
  3790. --^trtable=<translation_table_file>
  3791. If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
  3792. containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
  3793. branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
  3794. a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
  3795. to the user with "newname" on the destination.
  3796. Authentication options:
  3797. Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
  3798. 1) Using authentication parameters: --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
  3799. --^authmode=(^NameWorkingMode|^LDAPWorkingMode|^ADWorkingMode|^UPWorkingMode)
  3800. Examples:
  3801. (^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  3802. (^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
  3803. The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
  3804. in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
  3805. file can be easily generated from the Plastic GUI in the replication
  3806. profiles tab under Preferences.
  3807. If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
  3808. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
  3809. 2) Authentication file where you may have a different file for each server
  3810. you connect to, containing the credentials for that server.
  3811. --^authfile=<authentication_file>
  3812. The file contains 2 lines:
  3813. Line 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
  3814. Line 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
  3815. == CMD_HELP_PULL ==
  3816. Remarks:
  3817. The '^pull' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
  3818. changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
  3819. The repositories can be located at different servers.
  3820. There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
  3821. A '^pull' operation means that the replication operation will demand data
  3822. from the source repository to be stored into the destination repository.
  3823. The client will connect to the destination repository and, from that host,
  3824. it will establish a connection to the source repository to retrieve the
  3825. targeted data. During pull it is the destination server which will be
  3826. connected to the source.
  3827. Although in a typical distributed scenario a developer pushes data from his
  3828. local server to the main server, the developer might want to pull the latest
  3829. repository updates from the main server, too.
  3830. Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have been made
  3831. on the same branch on two replicated repositories:
  3832. - Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
  3833. than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
  3834. changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
  3835. - Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
  3836. correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
  3837. is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
  3838. scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
  3839. changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
  3840. being able to push again.
  3841. Pull can work in two modes:
  3842. 1) Direct communication between servers: The destination server will fetch
  3843. the data from the source server, automatically synchronizing data for
  3844. the specified branch.
  3845. 2) Import a previously generated package with push and the '--^package' option.
  3846. Mode 1) requires the user running the command to be authenticated
  3847. by the remote server, either using the default authentication in the
  3848. client.conf file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata' modifiers,
  3849. or '--^authmode' and '--^user' and '--^password' if the authentication mode is
  3850. ^UPWorkingMode.
  3851. Mode 2) requires using a package file previously generated with the push
  3852. command.
  3853. Keep in mind that pull replication works in an indirect way. When executed,
  3854. the command asks the destination repository to connect to the source and
  3855. obtain the selected branch.
  3856. However, this can be done directly by using the push command.
  3857. This will make the command replicate the selected branch from source to
  3858. destination.
  3859. Examples:
  3860. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084
  3861. (Pulls the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver'. In this case,
  3862. both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
  3863. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
  3864. --^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  3865. (Pulls the same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
  3866. to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
  3867. from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
  3868. integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
  3869. password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
  3870. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
  3871. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
  3872. (Pulls the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
  3873. server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
  3874. Plastic SCM.)
  3875. cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 --^nodata
  3876. (Replicates the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver' without data.)
  3877. cm ^pull ^hydrate ^br:/main@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
  3878. (Hydrates all the changesets in the 'main' branch obtaining the data from
  3879. the remote server.)
  3880. cm ^pull ^hydrate ^cs:122169@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
  3881. (Hydrates changeset 122169 in 'myserver' obtaining the data from the remote
  3882. server.)
  3883. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_PUSH ==
  3884. Pushes a branch to another repo.
  3885. == CMD_USAGE_PUSH ==
  3886. Usage:
  3887. cm ^push <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
  3888. [--^preview] [TranslateOptions]
  3889. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  3890. (Direct server-to-server replication. Pushes a branch from a repository.)
  3891. cm ^push <src_br_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
  3892. (Package based replication. Creates a replication package in the source
  3893. server with the selected branch.)
  3894. src_br_spec The branch to push to a remote repository.
  3895. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
  3896. dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
  3897. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  3898. specs.)
  3899. --^package Specifies path for exporting replication package for
  3900. package based replication.
  3901. Useful to move data between servers when there is no
  3902. direct network connection.
  3903. Options:
  3904. --^preview Gives information about what changes will be pushed,
  3905. but no changes are actually performed. This option is
  3906. useful to check the data that will be transferred before
  3907. replicating changes.
  3908. TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
  3909. --^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
  3910. different in source and destination and there is not a
  3911. profile to authenticate to destination.
  3912. AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more
  3913. information.
  3914. Translate options:
  3915. --^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
  3916. The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
  3917. modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names
  3918. from the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the
  3919. following values:
  3920. ^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
  3921. ^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
  3922. ^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
  3923. (see below).
  3924. --^trtable=<translation_table_file>
  3925. If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
  3926. containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
  3927. branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
  3928. a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
  3929. to the user with "newname" on the destination.
  3930. Authentication options:
  3931. Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
  3932. 1) Using authentication parameters: --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
  3933. --^authmode=(^NameWorkingMode|^LDAPWorkingMode|^ADWorkingMode|^UPWorkingMode)
  3934. Examples:
  3935. (^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  3936. (^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
  3937. The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
  3938. in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
  3939. file can be easily generated from the Plastic GUI in the replication
  3940. profiles tab under Preferences.
  3941. If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
  3942. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
  3943. 2) Authentication file where you may have a different file for each server
  3944. you connect to, containing the credentials for that server.
  3945. --^authfile=<authentication_file>
  3946. The file contains 2 lines:
  3947. Line 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
  3948. Line 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
  3949. == CMD_HELP_PUSH ==
  3950. Remarks:
  3951. The '^push' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
  3952. changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
  3953. The repositories can be located at different servers.
  3954. There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
  3955. A '^push' operation means that the replication operation will send data
  3956. from the source repository to the destination repository. In this case,
  3957. the client will connect to the source repository, getting the data to
  3958. replicate, and then it will send it to the destination repository. While
  3959. the former (source) must have connectivity to the destination, the latter
  3960. (destination) will not connect itself to the source.
  3961. In a typical distributed scenario, a developer pushes data from his local
  3962. server to the main server. Also, the developer might want to pull the latest
  3963. repository updates from the main server, too.
  3964. Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have
  3965. been made on the same branch on two replicated repositories.
  3966. - Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
  3967. than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
  3968. changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
  3969. - Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
  3970. correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
  3971. is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
  3972. scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
  3973. changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
  3974. being able to push again.
  3975. Push can work in two modes:
  3976. 1) Direct communication between servers: The origin server will send
  3977. the data to the destination server, automatically synchronizing data
  3978. for the specified branch.
  3979. 2) Export package mode: The client will only connect to the source and
  3980. generate a replication package obtaining both data and metadata for the
  3981. specified branch. The '--^package' modifier will be used.
  3982. Both modes require the user running the command to be authenticated
  3983. by the server, either using the default authentication in the client.conf
  3984. file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata' modifiers.
  3985. The ^push replication works in a direct way. When executed, the command
  3986. will replicate the selected branch from source to destination, instead of
  3987. asking the destination repository to connect to the source and obtain the
  3988. selected branch (as the pull does).
  3989. Examples:
  3990. cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
  3991. (Replicates the 'main' branch from 'myserver' to 'remoteserver'. In this case,
  3992. both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
  3993. cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
  3994. --^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  3995. (Replicates same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
  3996. to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
  3997. from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
  3998. integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
  3999. password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
  4000. cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
  4001. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
  4002. (Replicates the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
  4003. server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
  4004. Plastic SCM.)
  4005. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_CLONE ==
  4006. Clones a remote repository.
  4007. == CMD_USAGE_CLONE ==
  4008. Usage:
  4009. cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> [<dst_rep_spec> | <dst_repserver_spec>]
  4010. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  4011. [TranslateOptions]
  4012. (Direct repository-to-repository clone.)
  4013. cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file>
  4014. [--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
  4015. (Clones to an intermediate package, that can be imported later using a
  4016. pull into the destination repository.)
  4017. src_rep_spec Source repository of the clone operation.
  4018. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  4019. specs.)
  4020. dst_rep_spec Destination repository of the clone operation. If it
  4021. exists, it must be empty. If it does not exist, it will
  4022. be created.
  4023. If it is not specified, the command will use user's
  4024. default repository server.
  4025. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  4026. specs.)
  4027. dst_repserver_spec Destination repository server of the clone operation.
  4028. If there is a repository with the same name as
  4029. <src_rep_spec> in the destination repository server, it
  4030. must be empty. If there is not, it will be created.
  4031. If it is not specified, the command will use user's
  4032. default repository server.
  4033. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
  4034. server specs.)
  4035. Options:
  4036. --^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
  4037. different in source and destination and there is not a
  4038. profile to authenticate to destination.
  4039. --^package Exports the specified repository to a package file,
  4040. instead of a repository.
  4041. Useful for moving data between servers when there is no
  4042. direct network connection.
  4043. The resulting package must be imported using the
  4044. pull command.
  4045. TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
  4046. AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more
  4047. information.
  4048. Translate options:
  4049. --^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
  4050. The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
  4051. modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
  4052. the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
  4053. values:
  4054. ^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
  4055. ^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
  4056. ^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
  4057. (see below).
  4058. --^trtable=<translation_table_file>
  4059. If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
  4060. containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
  4061. branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
  4062. a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
  4063. to the user with "newname" on the destination.
  4064. Authentication options:
  4065. Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
  4066. 1) Using authentication parameters: --^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
  4067. --^authmode=(^NameWorkingMode|^LDAPWorkingMode|^ADWorkingMode|^UPWorkingMode)
  4068. Examples:
  4069. (^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
  4070. (^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
  4071. The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
  4072. in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
  4073. file can be easily generated from the Plastic GUI in the replication
  4074. profiles tab under Preferences.
  4075. If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
  4076. --^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
  4077. 2) Authentication file where you may have a different file for each server
  4078. you connect to, containing the credentials for that server.
  4079. --^authfile=<authentication_file>
  4080. The file contains 2 lines:
  4081. Line 1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
  4082. Line 2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
  4083. == CMD_HELP_CLONE ==
  4084. Remarks:
  4085. The clone command is able to replicate branches (along with their changesets,
  4086. labels, attributes, reviews, and so on) from a source repository to a
  4087. destination repository. The repositories can be located at different servers.
  4088. The destination repository can be created beforehand, but if it contains
  4089. previous data, the clone operation will fail.
  4090. The clone operation does NOT clone repository submodules, nor repositories
  4091. under a Xlink.
  4092. Examples:
  4093. cm ^clone awesomeProject@tardis@cloud
  4094. (Clones 'awesomeProject' repository from 'tardis@cloud' organization into
  4095. a local repository with the same name.)
  4096. cm ^clone repo@server.home:9095 repo-local
  4097. (Clones 'repo' from 'server.home:9095' into 'repo-local' at user's default
  4098. repository server.)
  4099. cm ^clone project@192.168.111.130:8084 ^repserver:192.168.111.200:9095
  4100. (Clones 'project' repository from '192.168.111.130:8084' into
  4101. 'project@192.168.111.200:9095'.)
  4102. cm ^clone project@ldapserver:8084 --authfile=credentials.txt \
  4103. --^trmode=table --^trtable=table.txt
  4104. (Clones 'project' repository from 'ldapserver:8084' using an authentication
  4105. file against the remote repository, and translating users following the
  4106. specified translation table.)
  4107. cm ^clone project@server.home:9095 --^package=project.plasticpkg
  4108. cm ^repository ^create project@mordor.home:8084
  4109. cm ^pull --^package=project.plasticpkg project@mordor.home:8084
  4110. (Clones 'project' repository from 'server.home:9095' into the package
  4111. 'project.plasticpkg', which is later imported through a pull into
  4112. the 'project' repository at 'mordor.home:8084'.)
  4113. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVERT ==
  4114. Reverts an item to a previous revision.
  4115. == CMD_USAGE_REVERT ==
  4116. Usage:
  4117. cm ^revert <revspec>
  4118. revspec Specification of the changeset that contains the
  4119. revision which content will be loaded in the workspace.
  4120. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about revision
  4121. specs.)
  4122. == CMD_HELP_REVERT ==
  4123. Remarks:
  4124. The item must be checked in.
  4125. Examples:
  4126. cm ^revert dir#^cs:0
  4127. cm ^revert C:\mywks\dir\file1.txt#23456
  4128. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVISION_HISTORY ==
  4129. Displays the history of a file or directory.
  4130. == CMD_USAGE_REVISION_HISTORY ==
  4131. Usage:
  4132. cm ^history | ^hist <item_path>[ ...] [--^long | --^format=<str_format>]
  4133. [--^symlink] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  4134. item_path Items path. Use a whitespace to separate paths. Use
  4135. double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
  4136. Paths can be server path revisions too.
  4137. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  4138. Options:
  4139. --^long Shows additional information.
  4140. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  4141. Remarks for more info.
  4142. --^symlink Applies the history operation to the symlink and not to
  4143. the target.
  4144. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  4145. It is possible to specify an output file.
  4146. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  4147. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  4148. See the MSDN documentation at
  4149. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  4150. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  4151. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  4152. == CMD_HELP_REVISION_HISTORY ==
  4153. Remarks:
  4154. This command shows a list of revisions for a given item, and label, branch,
  4155. and comment info for each revision.
  4156. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  4157. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  4158. {0} | {^date} Date.
  4159. {1} | {^changesetid} Changeset number.
  4160. {2} | {^branch} Branch.
  4161. {4} | {^comment} Comment.
  4162. {5} | {^owner} Owner.
  4163. {6} | {^id} Revision id.
  4164. {7} | {^repository} Repository.
  4165. {8} | {^server} Server.
  4166. {9} | {^repspec} Repository spec.
  4167. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  4168. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  4169. Examples:
  4170. cm ^history file1.txt "file 2.txt"
  4171. cm ^hist c:\workspace --^long
  4172. (Displays all information.)
  4173. cm ^history link --^symlink
  4174. (Applies the history operation to the 'link' file and not to the target,
  4175. available on UNIX environments.)
  4176. cm ^history ^serverpath:/src/foo/bar.c#^br:/main/task001@myserver
  4177. (Retrieves the revision history from a server path in a given branch.)
  4178. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVISION_TREE ==
  4179. Shows the revision tree for an item.
  4180. == CMD_USAGE_REVISION_TREE ==
  4181. Usage:
  4182. cm ^tree <path> [--^symlink]
  4183. path Item path.
  4184. Options:
  4185. --^symlink Applies the operation to the link file and not to the target.
  4186. == CMD_HELP_REVISION_TREE ==
  4187. Examples:
  4188. cm ^tree fichero1.txt
  4189. cm ^tree c:\workspace
  4190. cm ^tree link --^symlink
  4191. (Applies the operation to the link file and not to the target; available on
  4192. UNIX environments.)
  4193. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_RM ==
  4194. Allows the user to delete files and directories.
  4195. == CMD_USAGE_RM ==
  4196. Usage:
  4197. cm ^remove | ^rm <command> [options]
  4198. Commands:
  4199. ^controlled (optional)
  4200. ^private
  4201. To get more information about each command run:
  4202. cm ^remove <command> --^usage
  4203. cm ^remove <command> --^help
  4204. == CMD_HELP_RM ==
  4205. Examples:
  4206. cm ^remove \path\controlled_file.txt
  4207. cm ^remove ^private \path\private_file.txt
  4208. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_RM_CONTROLLED ==
  4209. Deletes a file or directory from version control.
  4210. == CMD_USAGE_RM_CONTROLLED ==
  4211. Usage:
  4212. cm ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>]
  4213. [--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^nodisk]
  4214. item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
  4215. paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
  4216. paths.
  4217. Options:
  4218. --^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
  4219. format. See the Examples for more information.
  4220. --^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
  4221. format. See the Examples for more information.
  4222. --^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on
  4223. disk.
  4224. == CMD_HELP_RM_CONTROLLED ==
  4225. Remarks:
  4226. Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
  4227. directory in the source code control.
  4228. Requirements:
  4229. - The item must be under source code control.
  4230. Reading input from stdin:
  4231. The '^remove' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
  4232. dash "-".
  4233. Example: cm ^remove -
  4234. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  4235. This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to remove.
  4236. Example:
  4237. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^remove -
  4238. (In Windows, removes all .c files in the workspace.)
  4239. Examples:
  4240. cm ^remove src
  4241. (Removes 'src'. If src is a directory, this is the same as
  4242. 'cm ^remove -^R src'.)
  4243. cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{0} - REMOVED" \
  4244. --^errorformat="{0} - ERROR REMOVING"
  4245. (Removes 'file.txt' from version control and from disk, writing
  4246. "c:\workspace\file.txt - ^REMOVED" if the operation succeeded, or
  4247. "c:\workspace\file.txt - ^ERROR ^REMOVING" otherwise.)
  4248. cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^nodisk
  4249. (Removes 'file.txt' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
  4250. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_RM_PRIVATE ==
  4251. Deletes a private file or directory.
  4252. Warning: files deleted using the command are permanently erased, and are not
  4253. recoverable. It is recommended that you use the '--^dry-run' option to check
  4254. which files will be affected by the command.
  4255. == CMD_USAGE_RM_PRIVATE ==
  4256. Usage:
  4257. cm ^remove | ^rm ^private <path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^ignored]
  4258. [--^verbose] [--^dry-run]
  4259. path Path of the files or directories to remove. Use double
  4260. quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
  4261. whitespace to separate paths.
  4262. Options:
  4263. --^r Recursively deletes private files from within controlled
  4264. directories.
  4265. --^ignored Deletes also ignored and cloaked files and directories.
  4266. --^verbose Prints all affected paths.
  4267. --^dry-run Runs the command without making any changes on disk.
  4268. == CMD_HELP_RM_PRIVATE ==
  4269. Remarks:
  4270. If the path is a private file or directory, it will be deleted from disk.
  4271. If the path is a controlled file, the command fails.
  4272. If the path is a controlled directory, the command fails unless you
  4273. specify the '-^r' option, in which case it will delete all private files and
  4274. directories below the specified directory.
  4275. Examples:
  4276. cm ^remove ^private private_directory
  4277. (Deletes 'private_directory'.)
  4278. cm ^remove ^private c:\workspace\controlled_directory
  4279. (Fails, because 'controlled_directory' is not private.)
  4280. cm ^remove ^private -^r c:\workspace\controlled_directory
  4281. (Deletes all private files and directories below 'controlled_directory'.)
  4282. cm ^rm ^private --^dry-run --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
  4283. (Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
  4284. 'controlled_directory' without actually deleting anything.)
  4285. cm ^rm ^private --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
  4286. (Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
  4287. 'controlled_directory', performing the delete.)
  4288. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
  4289. Deletes a trigger.
  4290. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
  4291. Usage:
  4292. cm ^trigger | ^tr ^delete | ^rm <subtype-type> <position_number>
  4293. [--^server=<repserverspec>]
  4294. subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
  4295. Type 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
  4296. types.
  4297. position_number Position assigned to the trigger when it was created.
  4298. Options:
  4299. --^server Deletes the trigger on the specified server.
  4300. If no server is specified, executes the command on the
  4301. one configured on the client.
  4302. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
  4303. Examples:
  4304. cm ^trigger ^delete ^after-setselector 4
  4305. cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
  4306. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
  4307. Sets an attribute on a given object.
  4308. == CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
  4309. Usage:
  4310. cm ^attribute | ^att ^set <att_spec> <object_spec> <att_value>
  4311. att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  4312. learn more about attribute specs.)
  4313. object_spec Specification of the object to set the attribute on.
  4314. Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
  4315. shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
  4316. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  4317. att_value The attribute value to set to the object.
  4318. == CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
  4319. Remarks:
  4320. An attribute can be set on an object to save additional information for
  4321. this object.
  4322. Attributes can be set on the following objects: branches, changesets,
  4323. shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
  4324. Examples:
  4325. cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
  4326. (Sets attribute 'status' to branch 'SCM105' with value 'open'.)
  4327. cm ^att ^set ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084 ^lb:LB008@reptest@server2:8084 yes
  4328. (Sets attribute 'integrated' to label 'LB008' in repository 'reptest' with
  4329. value 'yes'.)
  4330. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETOWNER ==
  4331. Sets the owner of an object.
  4332. == CMD_USAGE_SETOWNER ==
  4333. Usage:
  4334. cm ^setowner | ^sto --^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group> <object_spec>
  4335. --^user User name. New owner of the object.
  4336. --^group Group name. New owner of the object.
  4337. object_spec Specification of the object to set the new owner on.
  4338. The owner can be set on the following objects:
  4339. repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
  4340. label, item, revision and attribute.
  4341. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  4342. == CMD_HELP_SETOWNER ==
  4343. Remarks:
  4344. The owner of an object can be a user or a group.
  4345. The owner can be set on the following objects: repository server,
  4346. repository, branch, changeset, label, item, revision, and attribute.
  4347. Examples:
  4348. cm ^setowner --^user=john ^repserver:localhost:8084
  4349. (Sets 'john' as repository server owner.)
  4350. cm ^sto --^group=development ^rep:mainRep@PlasticServer:8084
  4351. (Sets 'development' group as owner of 'mainRep' repository.)
  4352. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETSELECTOR ==
  4353. Sets the selector to a workspace.
  4354. == CMD_USAGE_SETSELECTOR ==
  4355. This command is deprecated. It is still present for backwards compatibility
  4356. but selectors were largely deprecated in Plastic SCM 4.0. Selectors still
  4357. exist to specify the working branch or changeset, but the old rules to
  4358. filter paths are no longer supported.
  4359. Usage:
  4360. cm ^setselector | ^sts [--^file=<selector_file>] [--^ignorechanges]
  4361. [--^forcedetailedprogress] [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
  4362. Options:
  4363. --^file File to load a selector from.
  4364. --^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
  4365. shown if there are pending changes detected when
  4366. updating the workspace.
  4367. --^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
  4368. is redirected.
  4369. wk_path Path of the workspace to set the selector.
  4370. wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  4371. to learn more about workspace specs.)
  4372. == CMD_HELP_SETSELECTOR ==
  4373. Remarks:
  4374. This command sets the selector of a workspace.
  4375. A workspace needs information to load revisions from the repository.
  4376. To get this information, Plastic SCM uses a selector.
  4377. Using a selector, it is possible to load revisions from a given branch,
  4378. label, or changeset.
  4379. If a file to load the selector is not specified, the default Operating
  4380. System editor will be executed.
  4381. Sample selector:
  4382. ^repository "^default" // working repository
  4383. ^path "/" // rules will be applied to the root directory
  4384. ^branch "/^main" // obtain latest revisions from ^br:/^main
  4385. ^checkout "/^main" // place checkouts on branch ^br:/^main
  4386. Examples:
  4387. cm ^sts
  4388. (Opens the current selector file to be applied.)
  4389. cm ^sts ^wk:workspace_projA@reptest
  4390. (Opens the specified selector file to be applied.)
  4391. cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml
  4392. (Sets the specified selector file in the current workspace.)
  4393. cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml ^wk:MyWorkspace
  4394. (Sets the specified selector file in the selected workspace.)
  4395. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVE ==
  4396. Shelves the contents of checked-out items.
  4397. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVE ==
  4398. This command is deprecated. Use 'cm ^shelveset' instead.
  4399. Usage:
  4400. cm ^shelve [<item_path>+] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
  4401. [-^c=str_comment | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  4402. [--^encoding=name] [--^comparisonmethod=comp_method]
  4403. (Shelves the contents.)
  4404. cm ^shelve --^apply=<sh_spec> [--^mount]
  4405. (Applies a stored shelveset.)
  4406. --^apply Restores the shelved contents of the specified shelveset.
  4407. Shelve specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
  4408. cm ^shelve --^delete=<sh_spec>
  4409. (Removes a stored shelveset.)
  4410. --^delete Removes the specified shelveset.
  4411. Shelveset specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
  4412. Options:
  4413. item_path Items to be shelved, separated by spaces. Quotes (") can
  4414. be used to specify paths containing spaces.
  4415. --^all The items changed, moved and deleted locally, on the
  4416. given paths, will also be included.
  4417. --^dependencies Includes local change dependencies in the items to
  4418. shelve.
  4419. -^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelveset.
  4420. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
  4421. shelveset.
  4422. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  4423. See the MSDN documentation at
  4424. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  4425. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  4426. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  4427. --^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See remarks for more info.
  4428. --^mount The mount point for the given repository.
  4429. == CMD_HELP_SHELVE ==
  4430. Remarks:
  4431. If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelve will involve
  4432. all the pending changes in the workspace.
  4433. The shelve operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
  4434. Requirements to shelve an item:
  4435. - The item must be under source code control.
  4436. - The item must be checked out or changed (--^all option must be used).
  4437. Comparison methods:
  4438. ^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
  4439. ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
  4440. ^ignoreeolwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
  4441. ^notignore Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
  4442. Set PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor to type the
  4443. comment.
  4444. Examples:
  4445. cm ^shelve -^c="my comment"
  4446. (Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
  4447. comment.)
  4448. cm ^shelve file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
  4449. (Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
  4450. commentshelve.txt file.)
  4451. cm ^shelve --^apply=^sh:3
  4452. (Applies a stored shelveset.)
  4453. cm ^shelve --^delete=^sh:3
  4454. (Removes a stored shelveset.)
  4455. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelve -
  4456. (Shelves client changelist.
  4457. The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
  4458. 'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
  4459. shelve command.)
  4460. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET ==
  4461. Allows the user to manage shelvesets.
  4462. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET ==
  4463. Usage:
  4464. cm ^shelveset <command> [options]
  4465. Commands:
  4466. ^create | ^mk
  4467. ^delete | ^rm
  4468. ^apply
  4469. To get more information about each command run:
  4470. cm ^shelveset <command> --^usage
  4471. cm ^shelveset <command> --^help
  4472. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET ==
  4473. Examples:
  4474. cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
  4475. cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
  4476. cm ^shelve ^apply ^sh:3
  4477. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  4478. Shelves pending changes.
  4479. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  4480. Usage:
  4481. cm ^shelveset ^create | ^mk [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
  4482. [-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
  4483. Options:
  4484. item_path Items to shelve. Use a whitespace to separate user names.
  4485. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
  4486. spaces.
  4487. --^all The items changed, moved, and deleted locally, on the
  4488. given paths, will also be included.
  4489. --^dependencies Includes local change dependencies into the items to
  4490. shelve.
  4491. -^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelve.
  4492. -^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
  4493. shelve.
  4494. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
  4495. The '^shelveset ^create' command stores the contents of checked out items inside the
  4496. repository. This way the contents are protected without the need to
  4497. checkin the files.
  4498. Remarks:
  4499. If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelveset will
  4500. include all the pending changes in the workspace.
  4501. The '^shelveset ^create' operation is always applied recursively from the
  4502. given path.
  4503. Requirements to shelve an item:
  4504. - The item must be under source code control.
  4505. - The item must be checked out or changed ('--^all' option must be used).
  4506. Set PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor to type the
  4507. comment.
  4508. Examples:
  4509. cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
  4510. (Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
  4511. comment.)
  4512. cm ^shelveset file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
  4513. (Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
  4514. 'commentshelve.txt' file. Note, '^create' is the default subcommand.)
  4515. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelveset -
  4516. (Shelves client changelist.
  4517. The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
  4518. 'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
  4519. '^shelveset' command.)
  4520. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  4521. Deletes a shelveset.
  4522. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  4523. Usage:
  4524. cm ^shelveset ^delete | ^rm <sh_spec>
  4525. sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  4526. learn more about shelveset specs.)
  4527. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
  4528. The '^shelveset ^delete' command deletes a shelveset.
  4529. Examples:
  4530. cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
  4531. (Removes a stored shelveset.)
  4532. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  4533. Applies a stored shelveset.
  4534. == CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  4535. Usage:
  4536. cm ^shelveset ^apply <sh_spec> [--^mount] [--^encoding=<name>]
  4537. [--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces| \
  4538. ^ignoreeolwhitespaces | ^notignore)]
  4539. sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  4540. learn more about shelveset specs.)
  4541. Options:
  4542. --^mount The mount point for the given repository.
  4543. --^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
  4544. See the MSDN documentation at
  4545. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  4546. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  4547. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  4548. --^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
  4549. == CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
  4550. The '^shelveset ^apply' command restores the contents of a stored shelveset.
  4551. Remarks:
  4552. Comparison methods:
  4553. ^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
  4554. ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
  4555. ^ignoreeolwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
  4556. ^notignore Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
  4557. Examples:
  4558. cm ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3
  4559. (Applies a stored shelve.)
  4560. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
  4561. Lists objects and attributes.
  4562. == CMD_USAGE_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
  4563. Usage:
  4564. cm ^showfindobjects
  4565. == CMD_HELP_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
  4566. Available objects and attributes:
  4567. ^attribute:
  4568. You can find attributes by filtering using the following fields:
  4569. ^type : string.
  4570. Example:
  4571. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^type = 'status'"
  4572. (Finds all attributes of type 'status'.)
  4573. ^value : string.
  4574. ^date : date.
  4575. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4576. Example:
  4577. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^this ^week'"
  4578. (Finds all attributes applied during the current week.)
  4579. ^owner : user.
  4580. Admits special user '^me'.
  4581. Example:
  4582. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^value = 'resolved' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
  4583. (Finds all attributes with value 'resolved' applied by me.)
  4584. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4585. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4586. ^comment : string.
  4587. ^srcobj : object spec: item path, branch, changeset, revision, or label.
  4588. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
  4589. Examples:
  4590. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^item:readme.txt'"
  4591. (Finds the attributes applied to the item 'readme.txt'.)
  4592. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^br:/main/scm23343'"
  4593. (Finds the attributes applied to the branch scm23343.)
  4594. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:readme.txt#^br:/main/task002'"
  4595. (Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision.)
  4596. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:^revid:1126'"
  4597. (Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision id.)
  4598. ^ID : integer.
  4599. ^attributetype:
  4600. You can find attribute types by filtering using the following fields:
  4601. ^name : string.
  4602. Example:
  4603. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^name ^like 'st%'"
  4604. (Finds all attribute where name starts with 'st'.)
  4605. ^value : string.
  4606. ^date : date.
  4607. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4608. Example:
  4609. cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^today'"
  4610. (Finds all attributes applied today.)
  4611. ^owner : user.
  4612. Admits special user '^me'.
  4613. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4614. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4615. ^comment : string.
  4616. Example:
  4617. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^comment != ''" --^xml
  4618. (Finds all attribute types that have a comment and prints the
  4619. output in XML format to the standard output.)
  4620. ^source : object spec: item path, branch, changeset or label.
  4621. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
  4622. Example:
  4623. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^item:readme.txt'"
  4624. (Finds all attribute types in item 'readme.txt'.)
  4625. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^cs:30'"
  4626. (Finds all attribute types in changeset '30'.)
  4627. cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^lb:v0.14.1'"
  4628. (Finds all attribute types in label 'v0.14.1'.)
  4629. ^ID : integer.
  4630. Replication field. Check "replication related fields" below.
  4631. ^ReplLogId
  4632. ^ReplSrcDate
  4633. ^ReplSrcId
  4634. ^ReplSrcRepository
  4635. ^ReplSrcServer
  4636. ^branch:
  4637. You can find branches by filtering using the following fields:
  4638. ^name : string.
  4639. Example:
  4640. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^name ^like 'scm23%'"
  4641. (Finds branches which name starts with 'scm23'.)
  4642. ^date : date.
  4643. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4644. Example:
  4645. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
  4646. (Finds branches created during the last week.)
  4647. ^changesets : date (of the changesets in the branch).
  4648. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4649. Example:
  4650. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^changesets >= '^today'"
  4651. (Finds branches with changesets created today.)
  4652. ^attribute : string.
  4653. ^attrvalue : string.
  4654. Example:
  4655. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue = 'failed'"
  4656. (Finds branches that have the attribute 'status' and which
  4657. value is 'failed'.)
  4658. ^owner : user.
  4659. Admits special user '^me'.
  4660. ^parent : branch spec.
  4661. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  4662. Example:
  4663. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^parent != '^br:/main'"
  4664. (Finds branches created by other than me and which parent
  4665. branch is not '/main'.)
  4666. ^comment : string.
  4667. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4668. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4669. ^ID : integer.
  4670. Example:
  4671. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^id = 2029607"
  4672. (Finds the branch which id is 2029607.)
  4673. Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
  4674. ^ReplLogId
  4675. ^ReplSrcDate
  4676. ^ReplSrcId
  4677. ^ReplSrcRepository
  4678. ^ReplSrcServer
  4679. ^changeset:
  4680. You can find changesets by filtering using the following fields:
  4681. ^branch : branch spec.
  4682. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this
  4683. object.
  4684. Example:
  4685. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^branch = '/main/scm23119'"
  4686. (Finds all changesets in branch 'scm23119'.)
  4687. ^changesetid : integer.
  4688. ^attribute : string.
  4689. Example:
  4690. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^attribute = 'status'"
  4691. (Finds the changesets with the attribute 'status'.)
  4692. ^attrvalue : string.
  4693. ^date : date.
  4694. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4695. ^owner : user.
  4696. Admits special user '^me'.
  4697. Example:
  4698. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^date >= '6/8/2018' ^and ^owner != '^me'"
  4699. (Finds all changesets with creation date equal or
  4700. greater than 6/8/2018 and created by others than me.)
  4701. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4702. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4703. Example:
  4704. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^guid = '1b30674f-14cc-4fd7-962b-676c8a6f5cb6'"
  4705. (Finds the changeset with the specified guid.)
  4706. ^comment : string.
  4707. Example:
  4708. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^comment = ''"
  4709. (Finds the changesets with no comments.)
  4710. ^onlywithrevisions : boolean.
  4711. To filter whether a cset has revisions or not.
  4712. Example:
  4713. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^onlywithrevisions = 'false'"
  4714. (Finds changesets with no revisions.)
  4715. ^returnparent : boolean.
  4716. A way to return the parent of a cset. Good for scripting.
  4717. Example:
  4718. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^changesetid = 29 ^and ^returnparent = 'true'"
  4719. (Finds the parent of changeset 29.)
  4720. ^parent : changeset id (integer).
  4721. Example:
  4722. cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^parent = 548"
  4723. (Finds all changesets which parent is cset 548.)
  4724. ^ID : integer.
  4725. Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
  4726. ^ReplLogId
  4727. ^ReplSrcDate
  4728. ^ReplSrcId
  4729. ^ReplSrcRepository
  4730. ^ReplSrcServer
  4731. ^label:
  4732. You can find labels by filtering using the following fields:
  4733. ^name : string.
  4734. Example:
  4735. cm ^find ^label "^where ^name ^like '7.0.16.%'"
  4736. (Finds the labels with a name that starts with '7.0.16.'.)
  4737. ^attribute : string.
  4738. ^attrvalue : string.
  4739. ^date : date.
  4740. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4741. Example:
  4742. cm ^find ^label "^where ^date >= '^this ^month' ^and \
  4743. ^attribute = 'publish-status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'PUBLISHED'"
  4744. (Finds the labels created this month with an attribute 'publish-status'
  4745. set to a value other than 'PUBLISHED'.)
  4746. ^owner : user.
  4747. Admits special user '^me'.
  4748. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4749. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4750. ^branch : branch spec.
  4751. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  4752. Example:
  4753. cm ^find ^label "^where ^branch = '/main'"
  4754. (Finds all labels applied to the main branch.)
  4755. ^branchid : integer.
  4756. ^changeset : changeset id (integer).
  4757. Example:
  4758. cm ^find ^label "^where ^changeset = 111733"
  4759. (Finds the labels applied to changeset 111733.)
  4760. ^comment : string.
  4761. ^ID : integer.
  4762. Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
  4763. ^ReplLogId
  4764. ^ReplSrcDate
  4765. ^ReplSrcId
  4766. ^ReplSrcRepository
  4767. ^ReplSrcServer
  4768. ^merge:
  4769. You can find merges by filtering using the following fields:
  4770. ^srcbranch : branch spec.
  4771. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  4772. Example:
  4773. cm ^find ^merge "^where ^srcbranch = '^br:/main'"
  4774. (Finds merges from the main branch.)
  4775. ^srcchangeset : changeset id (integer).
  4776. ^dstbranch : branch spec.
  4777. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  4778. ^dstchangeset : changeset id (integer).
  4779. Example:
  4780. cm ^find ^merge "^where ^dstchangeset = 108261" \
  4781. --^format="{^srcbranch} {^srcchangeset} {^dstbranch} {^dstchangeset} {^owner}"
  4782. (Finds the merges to changeset 108261 and prints the
  4783. formatted output showing the source (branch and cset id),
  4784. the destination (branch and cset id), and the merge owner.)
  4785. ^date : date.
  4786. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4787. ^owner : user.
  4788. Admits special user '^me'.
  4789. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4790. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4791. ^type : string.
  4792. Possible values are '^merge', '^cherrypick',
  4793. '^cherrypicksubstractive', '^interval', '^intervalcherrypick'
  4794. and '^intervalcherrypicksubstractive'
  4795. Example:
  4796. cm ^find ^merge "^where ^type = '^cherrypick' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
  4797. (Finds all my cherrypicks.)
  4798. ^ID : integer.
  4799. ^replicationlog:
  4800. You can find replication log by filtering using the following fields:
  4801. ^branch : branch spec.
  4802. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  4803. Example:
  4804. cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^branch = '/main/gm22358'"
  4805. (Finds the replication logs of branch 'gm22358'.)
  4806. ^repositoryname : string.
  4807. ^owner : user.
  4808. Admits special user '^me'.
  4809. ^date : date.
  4810. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4811. ^server : string.
  4812. ^package : boolean.
  4813. Example:
  4814. cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^package = 'T' ^and ^server ^like '%cloud%'"
  4815. (Finds the replication logs created from package which
  4816. server name contains 'cloud'.)
  4817. ^ID : integer.
  4818. ^review:
  4819. You can find code reviews by filtering using the following fields:
  4820. ^status : string.
  4821. ^assignee : string.
  4822. Example:
  4823. cm ^find ^review "^where ^status = 'pending' ^and ^assignee = '^me'"
  4824. (Finds all my pending reviews.)
  4825. ^title : string.
  4826. ^target : object spec: branch or changeset.
  4827. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  4828. Example:
  4829. cm ^find ^review "^where ^target = '^br:/main/scm17932'"
  4830. (Finds the reviews related to branch 'scm17932'.)
  4831. ^targetid : integer.
  4832. ^targettype : string.
  4833. Possible values are '^branch' and '^changeset'.
  4834. Example:
  4835. cm ^find ^review "^where ^targettype = '^changeset'"
  4836. (Finds the reviews which target type is changeset.)
  4837. ^date : date.
  4838. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4839. ^owner : user.
  4840. Admits special user '^me'.
  4841. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4842. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4843. ^ID : integer.
  4844. ^revision:
  4845. You can find revisions by filtering using the following fields:
  4846. ^branch : branch spec.
  4847. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
  4848. ^changeset : changeset id (integer).
  4849. Example:
  4850. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset >= 111756"
  4851. (Finds the revisions created in changeset 111756
  4852. and later.)
  4853. ^item : string or integer.
  4854. ^itemid : integer.
  4855. Examples:
  4856. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^itemid = 2250"
  4857. (Finds the revisions of item 'readme.txt' plus
  4858. item id 2250.)
  4859. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^item = 2250"
  4860. (Gets the same revisions as the previous example.)
  4861. ^attribute : string.
  4862. ^attrvalue : string.
  4863. Example:
  4864. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'open'"
  4865. (Finds the revisions with attribute 'status' which
  4866. value is other than 'open'.)
  4867. ^archived : boolean.
  4868. Example:
  4869. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^archived = 'true'"
  4870. (Finds the revisions that are archived in an
  4871. external storage.)
  4872. ^comment : string.
  4873. ^date : date.
  4874. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4875. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4876. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4877. ^owner : user.
  4878. Admits special user '^me'.
  4879. ^parent : revision id (integer).
  4880. ^returnparent : boolean.
  4881. ^shelve : shelve id (integer).
  4882. ^size : integer (in bytes).
  4883. ^type : string.
  4884. Possible values are '^dir', '^bin', and '^txt'.
  4885. Example:
  4886. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^type = '^txt' and \
  4887. ^size > 300000 ^and ^owner = '^me' and ^date >= '2 ^months ^ago'"
  4888. (Finds the text revisions created by me two months
  4889. ago and with size greater than about 3MB.)
  4890. ^workspacecheckoutid : integer.
  4891. ^ID : integer.
  4892. Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
  4893. ^ReplLogId
  4894. ^ReplSrcDate
  4895. ^ReplSrcId
  4896. ^ReplSrcRepository
  4897. ^ReplSrcServer
  4898. ^shelve:
  4899. You can find shelves by filtering using the following fields:
  4900. ^owner : user.
  4901. Admits special user '^me'.
  4902. ^date : date.
  4903. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
  4904. Example:
  4905. cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^date >= '^1 ^years ^ago'"
  4906. (Finds the shelves created by others than me during the last
  4907. year.)
  4908. ^attribute : string.
  4909. ^attrvalue : string.
  4910. ^comment : string.
  4911. ^GUID : Global Unique Identifier.
  4912. Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
  4913. ^parent : integer.
  4914. ^shelveid : integer.
  4915. Example:
  4916. cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^shelveid = 2"
  4917. (Finds the shelve with name 2.)
  4918. ^ID : integer.
  4919. Example:
  4920. cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^id >= 3848"
  4921. (Finds the shelves which object id is greater than 3848.)
  4922. Replication fields. Check "replication related fields" below.
  4923. ^ReplLogId
  4924. ^ReplSrcDate
  4925. ^ReplSrcId
  4926. ^ReplSrcRepository
  4927. ^ReplSrcServer
  4928. Replication related fields:
  4929. Many objects track replication data, meaning Plastic tracks where they were
  4930. originally created.
  4931. The fields you can use are:
  4932. ^ReplSrcServer : repspec. Stands for "replication source server".
  4933. Server where the object was replicated from.
  4934. Example:
  4935. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver='skull.codicefactory.com:9095'"
  4936. (Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'.)
  4937. ^ReplSrcRepository : string. Stands for "replication source repo". It is
  4938. the repository where the object was replicated from.
  4939. Example:
  4940. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver = 'skull.codicefactory.com:9095' \
  4941. ^and ^replsrcrepository = 'codice'"
  4942. (Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'
  4943. and from repository 'codice'.)
  4944. ^ReplLogId : integer. ID of the replication operation. In Plastic,
  4945. each time new objects are created from a replica,
  4946. a new 'replicationlog' is created.
  4947. Example:
  4948. cm ^find ^revision "^where ^repllogid = 2019974"
  4949. (Finds the revisions replicated from replica
  4950. 2019974.)
  4951. ^ReplSrcDate : date. It is the date when the replica actually took
  4952. place.
  4953. Replicated objects will retain its original creation
  4954. date, o this field is useful if you want to find
  4955. objects that where replicated within a specific
  4956. timeframe.
  4957. Example:
  4958. cm ^find ^label "^where ^replsrcdate >= '^one ^month ^ago' \
  4959. ^and ^date >= '15 ^days ^ago'"
  4960. (Finds the labels created 15 days ago and were
  4961. replicated one month ago.)
  4962. cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
  4963. 8780433 27/09/2018 8:49:38 codice@BACKYARD:8087 F mbarriosc
  4964. (Finds the replication logs created one week ago.)
  4965. Now, you can check that the replicated branch was
  4966. created before it was replicated over:
  4967. cm ^find ^branch "^where ^repllogid = 8780433"
  4968. 8780443 26/09/2018 12:20:55 /main/scm23078 maria codice T
  4969. ^ReplSrcId : integer. It is the ID of the replication source server.
  4970. You can discover this ID searching for
  4971. '^replicationsource' objects with the 'cm ^find' command.
  4972. Example:
  4973. cm ^find ^replicationsource
  4974. 7860739 codice@AFRODITA:8087 d9c4372a-dc55-4fdc-ad3d-baeb2e975f27
  4975. 8175854 codice@BACKYARD:8087 66700d3a-036b-4b9a-a26f-adfc336b14f9
  4976. Now, you can find the changesets replicated from
  4977. codice@AFRODITA:8087:
  4978. cm ^find ^changesets "^where ^replsrcid = 7860739"
  4979. Date constants:
  4980. You can use date formats that follow your machine localization settings.
  4981. For example, if your computer displays dates in the format 'MM-dd-yyyy',
  4982. you can use dates such as '12-31-2019' in your queries.
  4983. You can also use the following constants to simplify your queries:
  4984. '^today' : today's date.
  4985. '^yesterday' : yesterday's date.
  4986. '^this ^week' : current week's Monday date.
  4987. '^this ^month' : current month's 1st day date.
  4988. '^this ^year' : current year's January 1st date.
  4989. '^one ^day ^ago' : one day before the current date.
  4990. '^one ^week ^ago' : seven days before the current date.
  4991. '^one ^month ^ago' : one month before the current date.
  4992. 'n ^days ^ago' : 'n' days before the current date.
  4993. 'n ^months ^ago' : 'n' months before the current date.
  4994. 'n ^years ^ago' : 'n' years before the current date.
  4995. The following '^where' clauses are valid for fields of type '^date':
  4996. '(...) ^where ^date > '^today' (...)'
  4997. '(...) ^where ^date < '^yesterday' (...)'
  4998. '(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^week' (...)'
  4999. '(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^month' (...)'
  5000. '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^day ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^days ^ago' (...)'
  5001. '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^week ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^weeks ^ago' (...)'
  5002. '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^month ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^months ^ago' (...)'
  5003. '(...) ^where ^date > '1 ^year ^ago' (...)'
  5004. You can also force a specific date format on the 'cm ^find' command using the
  5005. --^dateformat flag. Check 'cm ^find --^help' for further details.
  5006. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
  5007. Displays available trigger types.
  5008. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
  5009. Usage:
  5010. cm ^trigger ^showtypes
  5011. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWACL ==
  5012. Shows the ACL of an object.
  5013. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWACL ==
  5014. Usage:
  5015. cm ^showacl | ^sa <object_spec> [--^extended] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
  5016. [--^encoding=<name>]
  5017. object_spec Specification of the object to show the ACL of.
  5018. The valid objects for this command are:
  5019. repserver, repository, branch, changeset, label, item,
  5020. and attribute.
  5021. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  5022. Options:
  5023. --^extended Shows ACL hierarchy tree.
  5024. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  5025. It is possible to specify an output file.
  5026. --^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
  5027. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  5028. See the MSDN documentation at
  5029. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  5030. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  5031. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  5032. == CMD_HELP_SHOWACL ==
  5033. Examples:
  5034. cm ^showacl ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
  5035. (Shows the ACL of the selected server.)
  5036. cm ^sa ^br:/main --^extended
  5037. (Shows the ACL hierarchy tree of the selected branch specification.)
  5038. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
  5039. Shows all the available commands.
  5040. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
  5041. Usage:
  5042. cm ^showcommands
  5043. == CMD_HELP_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
  5044. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWOWNER ==
  5045. Shows the owner of an object.
  5046. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWOWNER ==
  5047. Usage:
  5048. cm ^showowner | ^so <object_spec>
  5049. object_spec Specification of the object to show the owner of.
  5050. The object must be one of the following:
  5051. repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
  5052. label, attribute, revision, and item.
  5053. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  5054. == CMD_HELP_SHOWOWNER ==
  5055. Remarks:
  5056. This command displays the owner of an object. The owner can be a user or
  5057. a group. The owner can be modified with 'cm ^setowner' command.
  5058. Examples:
  5059. cm ^showowner ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
  5060. (Shows the owner of the selected server.)
  5061. cm ^so ^item:samples\
  5062. (Shows the owner of the selected item specification.)
  5063. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
  5064. Lists the available permissions.
  5065. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
  5066. Usage:
  5067. cm ^showpermissions | ^sp
  5068. == CMD_HELP_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
  5069. Examples:
  5070. cm ^showpermissions
  5071. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWSELECTOR ==
  5072. Shows the workspace selector.
  5073. == CMD_USAGE_SHOWSELECTOR ==
  5074. This command is deprecated. It is still present for backwards compatibility
  5075. but selectors were largely deprecated in Plastic SCM 4.0. Selectors still
  5076. exist to specify the working branch or changeset, but the old rules to
  5077. filter paths are no longer supported.
  5078. Usage:
  5079. cm ^showselector | ^ss [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
  5080. wk_path Path of the workspace to show the selector.
  5081. wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5082. learn more about workspace specs.)
  5083. == CMD_HELP_SHOWSELECTOR ==
  5084. Remarks:
  5085. If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
  5086. current directory as the workspace path.
  5087. Examples:
  5088. cm ^showselector c:\workspace
  5089. (Shows the selector for the selected workspace path.)
  5090. cm ^ss
  5091. (Shows the selector for current workspace.)
  5092. cm ^showselector > mySelector.txt
  5093. (Writes into a file the selector for the current workspace.)
  5094. cm ^showselector ^wk:mywk@reptest
  5095. (Shows the selector for the workspace 'mywk' in the repository 'reptest'.)
  5096. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT ==
  5097. Allows the user to perform support related operations.
  5098. == CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT ==
  5099. Usage:
  5100. cm ^support <command> [options]
  5101. Commands:
  5102. ^bundle
  5103. To get more information about each command run:
  5104. cm ^support <command> --^usage
  5105. cm ^support <command> --^help
  5106. == CMD_HELP_SUPPORT ==
  5107. Examples:
  5108. cm ^support
  5109. cm ^support ^bundle
  5110. cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
  5111. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
  5112. Creates a "support bundle" package with relevant logs.
  5113. You can attach the file while requesting help, asking for extra info, or
  5114. submitting a bug.
  5115. == CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
  5116. Usage:
  5117. cm ^support ^bundle [<outputfile>]
  5118. Options:
  5119. outputfile Creates the "support bundle" package at the specified
  5120. location.
  5121. == CMD_HELP_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
  5122. Remarks:
  5123. This command allows users to create a "support bundle" package which can be
  5124. attached when requesting help, asking for extra info, or submitting a bug.
  5125. The user can optionally specify a location for the output file; otherwise, the
  5126. output file will be written to the temp directory.
  5127. Examples:
  5128. cm ^support ^bundle
  5129. (Creates "support bundle" in temp directory.)
  5130. cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
  5131. (Creates "support bundle" at the specified location.)
  5132. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH ==
  5133. Switches the workspace to a branch, changeset, label, or shelveset.
  5134. == CMD_USAGE_SWITCH ==
  5135. Usage:
  5136. cm ^switch (<brspec> | <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>)
  5137. [--^workspace=<path>] [--^repository=<name>]
  5138. [--^forcedetailedprogress]
  5139. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch, changeset, label,
  5140. and shelveset specifications.)
  5141. Options:
  5142. --^workspace Path where the workspace is located.
  5143. --^repository Switches to the specified repository.
  5144. --^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard
  5145. output is redirected.
  5146. == CMD_HELP_SWITCH ==
  5147. Remarks:
  5148. This command allows users to update the workspace tree to the contents
  5149. of the specified object (branch, label, shelveset, or changeset).
  5150. Examples:
  5151. cm ^switch ^br:/main
  5152. cm ^switch ^lb:Rel1.1
  5153. cm ^switch ^br:/main/scm002 --^repository=rep2
  5154. cm ^switch ^cs:4375
  5155. cm ^switch ^sh:2
  5156. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
  5157. Sets a branch as the working branch.
  5158. == CMD_USAGE_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
  5159. This command is deprecated. Use cm switch instead.
  5160. Usage:
  5161. cm ^switchtobranch [options] [branch_spec]
  5162. branch_spec: Branch specification.
  5163. Options:
  5164. --^label=name | --^changeset=number: load revisions from the specified
  5165. label or changeset. One of these options is required if no branch_spec is
  5166. given.
  5167. --^changeset=cset: Switch to the specified changeset.
  5168. --^repository=rep: Switch to the specified repository.
  5169. --^workspace | -wk=path: path where the workspace is located.
  5170. == CMD_HELP_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
  5171. Remarks:
  5172. This command allows users to work in a branch.
  5173. If no branch_spec specified, a label or a changeset must be specified.
  5174. If no repository is specified, the branch is set to the current repository.
  5175. Examples:
  5176. cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main
  5177. cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main/task001
  5178. cm ^switchtobranch --^label=BL050
  5179. (Read-only configuration. The command loads the contents of the labeled
  5180. changeset.)
  5181. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_SYNC ==
  5182. Synchronize with Git.
  5183. == CMD_USAGE_SYNC ==
  5184. Usage:
  5185. cm ^synchronize | ^sync <repspec> ^git [<url> [--^user=<usr_name> --^pwd=<pwd>]]
  5186. [(--^txtsimilaritypercent | --^binsimilaritypercent | \
  5187. --^dirsimilaritypercent)=<value>]
  5188. [--^author] [--^skipgitlfs]
  5189. repspec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' t
  5190. learn more about repository specs.)
  5191. git (Default).
  5192. Options:
  5193. url Remote repository URL (http(s):// or git:// or a
  5194. SSH URL).
  5195. --^user User name for the specified URL.
  5196. --^pwd Password for the specified URL.
  5197. --^txtsimilaritypercent \
  5198. --^binsimilaritypercent \
  5199. --^dirsimilaritypercent
  5200. To detect moved items, the same way as Plastic SCM
  5201. GUI does.
  5202. --^author Uses name and timestamp values from the git author.
  5203. (git committer by default)
  5204. --^skipgitlfs Ignores the Git LFS configuration in the
  5205. .gitattributes file. It acts like without Git LFS
  5206. support.
  5207. == CMD_HELP_SYNC ==
  5208. Remarks:
  5209. If the git repository requires user and password, then use '^url', '--^user',
  5210. and '--^pwd' options.
  5211. If the git repository doesn't require user and password, then use '^url'
  5212. option with the first sync operation. With next sync operations, '^url'
  5213. option is optional.
  5214. To use the SSH protocol to perform the sync, you must have the 'ssh' client
  5215. added to the PATH environment variable and properly configured to connect
  5216. to the remote host (i.e. private/public keys configured).
  5217. Examples:
  5218. cm ^sync default@localhost:8087 ^git git://localhost/repository
  5219. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER ==
  5220. Allows the user to manage triggers.
  5221. == CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER ==
  5222. Usage:
  5223. cm ^trigger | ^tr <command> [options]
  5224. Commands:
  5225. ^create | ^mk
  5226. ^delete | ^rm
  5227. ^edit
  5228. ^list | ^ls
  5229. ^showtypes
  5230. To get more information about each command run:
  5231. cm ^trigger <command> --^usage
  5232. cm ^trigger <command> --^help
  5233. == CMD_HELP_TRIGGER ==
  5234. Examples:
  5235. cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
  5236. cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
  5237. cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
  5238. cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
  5239. cm ^tr ^showtypes
  5240. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_TUBE ==
  5241. Runs commands related to Plastic Tube.
  5242. == CMD_USAGE_TUBE ==
  5243. Usage:
  5244. cm ^tube ^config -^u=<user> -^p=<password>
  5245. (Configures Plastic SCM to use Plastic Tube with the specified user and
  5246. password.)
  5247. cm ^tube ^create <remoteuser>
  5248. (Creates the tube "remoteuser -> myuser".
  5249. The user "myuser" allows to "remoteuser" to connect to "myuser" server.
  5250. Connections can be established from "remoteuser" to "myuser".
  5251. Only tubes from other users to the current tube user can be created.)
  5252. cm ^tube ^remove <remoteuser>
  5253. (Removes the tube "remoteuser -> myuser".)
  5254. cm ^tube ^local
  5255. (Lists the local repositories shared in the local server and the users
  5256. that it is shared with.)
  5257. cm ^tube ^remote
  5258. (Lists the shared remote repositories that are shared with the current
  5259. tube user.)
  5260. cm ^tube ^share <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser> -^a=(^pull | ^push | ^pull,^push)
  5261. (Shares the local repository(s) with the remote user and sets the specified
  5262. access mode. Use a whitespace to separate repository specs.)
  5263. cm ^tube ^unshare <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser>
  5264. (Unshares the local repository(s) with the remote user. Use a whitespace to
  5265. separate repository specs.)
  5266. cm ^tube ^connect
  5267. (Connects the Plastic SCM server to Plastic Tube.)
  5268. cm ^tube ^disconnect
  5269. (Disconnects the Plastic SCM server from Plastic Tube.)
  5270. cm ^tube ^status
  5271. (Shows if the Plastic SCM server is connected to Plastic Tube.)
  5272. Options
  5273. -^u Tube user (the plasticscm.com user).
  5274. -^p User password.
  5275. -^a Sets the access mode.
  5276. rep_spec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5277. learn more about repository specs.)
  5278. == CMD_HELP_TUBE ==
  5279. Remarks:
  5280. Use the 'cm ^tube' command to manage Plastic Tube.
  5281. Examples:
  5282. cm ^tube ^config -^u=ruben@codicesoftware.com -^p=rubenpassword
  5283. cm ^tube ^create pablo@codicesoftware.com
  5284. ('pablo@codicesoftware.com' can connect to the current Plastic Tube user)
  5285. cm ^tube ^remove pablo@codicesoftware.com
  5286. cm ^tube ^local
  5287. cm ^tube ^remote
  5288. cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^pull,^push
  5289. cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 doc@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^push
  5290. cm ^tube ^unshare repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com
  5291. cm ^tube ^connect
  5292. cm ^tube ^disconnect
  5293. cm ^tube ^status
  5294. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNCO ==
  5295. Undoes the checkout of an item.
  5296. == CMD_USAGE_UNCO ==
  5297. Usage:
  5298. cm ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [-^a | --^all] [--^symlink] [--^silent]
  5299. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  5300. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  5301. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
  5302. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  5303. containing spaces.
  5304. Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
  5305. Options:
  5306. -^a | --^all Undoes all of the changes in the specified items. If
  5307. the item(s) were checked out, the checkout will be
  5308. reverted. If the item(s) were locally modified, the
  5309. modifications will be reverted.
  5310. --^symlink Applies the undocheckout operation to the link and not
  5311. to the target.
  5312. --^silent Does not show any output.
  5313. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  5314. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5315. specifies how the lines should start.
  5316. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5317. specifies how the lines should end.
  5318. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5319. specifies how the fields should be separated.
  5320. == CMD_HELP_UNCO ==
  5321. Remarks:
  5322. If an item is checked out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
  5323. the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
  5324. out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
  5325. Requirements:
  5326. - The item must be under source code control.
  5327. - The item must be checked out.
  5328. Reading input from stdin:
  5329. The '^undocheckout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  5330. single dash "-".
  5331. Example: cm ^undocheckout ^checkin -
  5332. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  5333. This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo the checkout.
  5334. Example:
  5335. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undocheckout --^all -
  5336. (In Windows, undoes the checkout of all .c files in the workspace.)
  5337. Examples:
  5338. cm ^undocheckout .
  5339. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
  5340. cm ^undocheckout file1.txt file2.txt
  5341. cm unco c:\workspace\file.txt
  5342. (Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
  5343. cm ^unco -^a file1.txt
  5344. (Undoes checkouts or local modifications of 'file1.txt')
  5345. cm ^unco link --^symlink
  5346. (Applies the undocheckout operation to the link file and not to the target,
  5347. available on UNIX environments.)
  5348. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^undocheckout -
  5349. (Undoes client changelist.
  5350. The command above will list the paths in the changelist named
  5351. 'pending_to_review' and the path list will be redirected to the input of the
  5352. undocheckout command).
  5353. cm ^unco . --^machinereadable
  5354. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
  5355. simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
  5356. cm ^unco . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" \
  5357. --^fieldseparator=","
  5358. (Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
  5359. simplified, easier to parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
  5360. separating the fields, with the specified strings.)
  5361. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNCOUNCHANGED ==
  5362. Undoes non-changed checked out items.
  5363. == CMD_USAGE_UNCOUNCHANGED ==
  5364. Usage:
  5365. cm ^uncounchanged | ^unuc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  5366. [--^symlink] [--^silent]
  5367. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
  5368. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  5369. containing spaces.
  5370. Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
  5371. Options:
  5372. -^R Undoes unchanged items recursively in the specified paths.
  5373. --^symlink Applies the uncounchanged operation to the link and not
  5374. to the target.
  5375. --^silent Does not show any output.
  5376. == CMD_HELP_UNCOUNCHANGED ==
  5377. Remarks:
  5378. This command is applied from the root of the workspace recursively.
  5379. Reading input from stdin:
  5380. The '^uncounchanged' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  5381. single dash "-".
  5382. Example: cm ^uncounchanged -
  5383. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  5384. This allows you to use pipe to specify for which unchanged files to undo
  5385. the checkout.
  5386. Example:
  5387. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^uncounchanged -
  5388. (In Windows, undoes the checkout on all unchanged .c files in the
  5389. workspace.)
  5390. Examples:
  5391. cm ^uncounchanged . -^R
  5392. (Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the current directory.)
  5393. cm ^unuc /home/myuser/mywk/project/templates -^R
  5394. (Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the selected directory.)
  5395. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDELETE ==
  5396. Undeletes an item using a specific revision.
  5397. == CMD_USAGE_UNDELETE ==
  5398. Usage:
  5399. cm ^undelete <revspec> <path>
  5400. revspec Specification of the revision whose contents will
  5401. be loaded in the workspace. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  5402. learn more about revision specs.)
  5403. path Restore path.
  5404. == CMD_HELP_UNDELETE ==
  5405. Remarks:
  5406. The item to undelete should not be already loaded in the workspace.
  5407. The '^undelete' operation is not supported for xlinks.
  5408. Example:
  5409. cm ^undelete ^revid:756 C:\mywks\src\foo.c
  5410. cm ^undelete ^itemid:68#^cs:2 C:\mywks\dir\myfile.pdf
  5411. cm ^undelete ^serverpath:/src#^br:/main C:\mywks\Dir
  5412. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHANGE ==
  5413. Undoes the changes on a path.
  5414. == CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHANGE ==
  5415. Usage:
  5416. cm ^undochange | ^unc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
  5417. item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
  5418. paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
  5419. containing spaces.
  5420. Use . to apply the operation to current directory.
  5421. Options:
  5422. -^R Applies the operation recursively.
  5423. == CMD_HELP_UNDOCHANGE ==
  5424. Remarks:
  5425. If an item is checked out or modified but not checked in and you do not
  5426. want to check it in, you can undo the changes using this command. The item
  5427. will be updated to the contents it had before.
  5428. Reading input from stdin:
  5429. The '^undochange' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
  5430. single dash "-".
  5431. Example: cm ^undochange -
  5432. Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
  5433. This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo changes.
  5434. Example:
  5435. dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undochange -
  5436. (In Windows, undoes the changes of all .c files in the workspace.)
  5437. Examples:
  5438. cm ^unc .
  5439. (Undoes changes of the files on the current directory.)
  5440. cm ^undochange . -^R
  5441. (Undoes changes of the files recursively on the current directory.)
  5442. cm ^unc file1.txt "file 2.txt"
  5443. (Undoes changes of the selected files.)
  5444. cm ^unc c:\workspace\file.txt
  5445. (Undoes changes of the selected file.)
  5446. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDO ==
  5447. Undoes changes in a workspace.
  5448. == CMD_USAGE_UNDO ==
  5449. Usage:
  5450. cm ^undo [<path>[ ...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive] [<filter>[ ...]]
  5451. [--^silent | --^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  5452. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  5453. path Path of the files or directories to apply the operation
  5454. to. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
  5455. spaces. Use a whitespace to separate paths.
  5456. If no path is specified, by default the undo
  5457. operation will take all of the files in the current
  5458. directory.
  5459. filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given
  5460. paths. Use a whitespace to separate filters. See the
  5461. Filters section for more information.
  5462. Options:
  5463. --^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
  5464. to the target.
  5465. -^r Executes the undo recursively.
  5466. --^silent Does not show any output.
  5467. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  5468. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  5469. how the lines should start.
  5470. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  5471. how the lines should end.
  5472. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
  5473. how the fields should be separated.
  5474. Filters:
  5475. If no flag is specified, by default all changes are undone, but the
  5476. paths can be filtered using one or more of the flags below.
  5477. If a file or directory matches one or more of the specified kinds of change,
  5478. all of the changes on said file or directory will be undone.
  5479. For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file is
  5480. both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
  5481. --^checkedout Selects checked-out files and directories.
  5482. --^unchanged Selects files whose content is unchanged.
  5483. --^changed Selects locally changed or checked-out files and
  5484. directories.
  5485. --^deleted Selects deleted files and directories.
  5486. --^moved Selects moved files and directories.
  5487. --^added Selects added files and directories.
  5488. == CMD_HELP_UNDO ==
  5489. Remarks:
  5490. The '^undo' command is dangerous - it undoes work in an irreversible way.
  5491. Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous state
  5492. of the files and directories affected by it. If no path is specified
  5493. in the arguments, by default it will undo every change in the current
  5494. directory, but not recursively.
  5495. These are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
  5496. /src
  5497. |- file.txt
  5498. |- code.cs
  5499. \- /test
  5500. |- test_a.py
  5501. \- test_b.py
  5502. cm ^undo
  5503. cm ^undo *
  5504. cm ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
  5505. cm ^undo .
  5506. cm ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
  5507. If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
  5508. To undo all of the changes below a directory (including changes affecting
  5509. the directory itself):
  5510. cm ^undo dirpath -^r
  5511. If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
  5512. undone.
  5513. Deleted items:
  5514. To undo file and directory deletions, you must either specify the full path
  5515. of the item, or specify the containing directory and use the recursive ('-^r')
  5516. flag.
  5517. For example:
  5518. cm ^undo .
  5519. (Does NOT undo deletions in the current directory.)
  5520. cm ^undo . -^r
  5521. (Undoes all deletions (and other changes) in the current directory recursively.)
  5522. cm ^undo src/file.txt
  5523. (Undoes deletion (or other change) of src/file.txt.)
  5524. Examples:
  5525. cm ^undo . -^r
  5526. (Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
  5527. from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
  5528. cm ^co file.txt
  5529. cm ^undo file.txt
  5530. (Undoes the checkout on 'file.txt'.)
  5531. ^echo ^content >> file.txt
  5532. cm ^undo file.txt
  5533. (Undoes the local change to 'file.txt'.)
  5534. cm ^undo src
  5535. (Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
  5536. cm ^undo src/*
  5537. (Undoes changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
  5538. affecting src.)
  5539. cm ^undo *.cs
  5540. (Undoes changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  5541. directory.)
  5542. cm ^undo *.cs -^r
  5543. (Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
  5544. directory and every directory below it.)
  5545. cm ^co file1.txt file2.txt
  5546. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  5547. cm ^undo --^unchanged
  5548. (Undoes the checkout of unchanged 'file2.txt', ignoring locally changed
  5549. 'file1.txt'.)
  5550. ^echo ^content >> file1.txt
  5551. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  5552. cm ^co file1.txt
  5553. cm ^undo --^checkedout
  5554. (Undoes the changes in checked-out file 'file1.txt', ignoring 'file2.txt' as
  5555. it is not checked-out.)
  5556. cm ^add file.txt
  5557. cm ^undo file.txt
  5558. (Undo the add of 'file.txt' making it once again a private file.)
  5559. ^rm file1.txt
  5560. ^echo ^content >> file2.txt
  5561. cm ^add file3.txt
  5562. cm ^undo --^deleted --^added *
  5563. (Undoes the 'file1.txt' delete and 'file3.txt' add, ignoring the 'file2.txt'
  5564. change.)
  5565. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
  5566. Undoes item locks on a lockserver.
  5567. == CMD_USAGE_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
  5568. Usage:
  5569. cm ^lock ^unlock [<repserverspec>] <guid>[ ...]
  5570. repserverspec Repository server specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
  5571. to learn more about repserver specs.)
  5572. guid A list of item GUIDs to be unlocked. Use a whitespace to
  5573. separate GUIDs.
  5574. == CMD_HELP_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
  5575. Remarks:
  5576. - The command uses the specified server to unlock the items.
  5577. - If no server is specified, the command tries to obtain a server from the
  5578. current workspace.
  5579. - If no server was calculated on the previous steps, the server is obtained
  5580. from the current Plastic SCM client configuration.
  5581. - Only the administrator of the server can run the 'cm ^unlock' command.
  5582. - To specify a GUID, the format should be the 32-digit separated by
  5583. hyphens format (optionally enclosed in braces):
  5584. {00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}
  5585. or 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000
  5586. Examples:
  5587. cm ^lock ^unlock 91961b14-3dfe-4062-8c4c-f33a81d201f5
  5588. (Undoes the selected item lock.)
  5589. cm ^lock ^unlock DIGITALIS:8084 2340b4fa-47aa-4d0e-bb00-0311af847865 \
  5590. bcb98a61-2f62-4309-9a26-e21a2685e075
  5591. (Undoes the selected item locks on lockserver named 'DIGITALIS'.)
  5592. cm ^lock ^unlock tardis@cloud 4740c4fa-56af-3dfe-de10-8711fa248635 \
  5593. 71263c17-5eaf-5271-4d2c-a25f72e101d4
  5594. (Undoes the selected item locks on cloud lockserver named 'tardis'.)
  5595. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_UPDATE ==
  5596. Updates the workspace and downloads latest changes.
  5597. == CMD_USAGE_UPDATE ==
  5598. Usage:
  5599. cm ^update [<item_path> | --^last]
  5600. [--^changeset=<csetspec>] [--^cloaked] [--^dontmerge] [--^forced]
  5601. [--^ignorechanges] [--^override] [--^recursewk] [--^skipchangedcheck]
  5602. [--^silent] [--^verbose] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
  5603. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
  5604. [--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
  5605. [--^forcedetailedprogress]
  5606. item_path Path to update.
  5607. Use . to apply update to current directory.
  5608. If no path is specified, then the current workspace is
  5609. fully updated.
  5610. --^last Changes the workspace selector from a changeset
  5611. configuration or a label configuration to a branch
  5612. configuration before updating.
  5613. The selector is changed to the branch the changeset or
  5614. label belongs to.
  5615. Options:
  5616. --^changeset Updates the workspace to a specific changeset.
  5617. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
  5618. changeset specs.)
  5619. --^cloaked Includes the cloaked items in the update operation.
  5620. If this option is not specified, those items that are
  5621. cloaked will be ignored in the operation.
  5622. --^dontmerge In case an update merge is required during the update
  5623. operation, does not perform it.
  5624. --^forced Forces updating items to the revision specified in
  5625. the selector.
  5626. --^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
  5627. shown if there are pending changes detected when
  5628. updating the workspace.
  5629. --^override Overrides changed files outside Plastic SCM control.
  5630. Their content will be overwritten with the server
  5631. content.
  5632. --^recursewk Updates all the workspaces found within the current
  5633. path. Useful to update all the workspaces contained
  5634. in a specific path.
  5635. --^skipchangedcheck The update checks if there are local changes in your
  5636. workspace before starting. If you always checkout
  5637. before modifying a file, you can use this check and
  5638. speed up the operation.
  5639. --^silent Does not show any output.
  5640. --^verbose Shows additional information.
  5641. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  5642. It is possible to specify an output file.
  5643. --^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
  5644. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  5645. See the MSDN documentation at
  5646. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  5647. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  5648. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  5649. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  5650. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5651. specifies how the lines should start.
  5652. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5653. specifies how the lines should end.
  5654. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5655. specifies how the fields should be separated.
  5656. --^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
  5657. is redirected.
  5658. == CMD_HELP_UPDATE ==
  5659. Remarks:
  5660. The '^update' command only downloads needed files.
  5661. The command assumes recursive operation.
  5662. When the '--^last' option is used, it is not necessary to specify a path.
  5663. In this case, the workspace the current working directory belongs to will
  5664. be updated.
  5665. (Remember that specifying this flag could cause the workspace
  5666. selector to be changed to a branch configuration if the selector was
  5667. previously pointing to a changeset or a label.)
  5668. Examples:
  5669. cm ^update
  5670. (Updates all in the current workspace.)
  5671. cm ^update .
  5672. (Updates current directory, and all children items.)
  5673. cm ^update . --^forced --^verbose
  5674. (Forces retrieval of all revisions.)
  5675. cm ^update --^last
  5676. cm ^update . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
  5677. (Updates current directory and prints the result in a simplified
  5678. easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified
  5679. strings.)
  5680. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_VERSION ==
  5681. Shows the current client version number.
  5682. == CMD_USAGE_VERSION ==
  5683. Usage:
  5684. cm ^version
  5685. == CMD_HELP_VERSION ==
  5686. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WHOAMI ==
  5687. Shows the current Plastic SCM user.
  5688. == CMD_USAGE_WHOAMI ==
  5689. Usage:
  5690. cm ^whoami
  5691. == CMD_HELP_WHOAMI ==
  5692. == CMD_USAGE_WKTREENODESTATUS ==
  5693. Usage:
  5694. cm ^wktreenodestatus path1, path2, ...
  5695. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE ==
  5696. Allows the user to manage workspaces.
  5697. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE ==
  5698. Usage:
  5699. cm ^workspace | ^wk <command> [options]
  5700. Commands:
  5701. ^list | ^ls
  5702. ^create | ^mk
  5703. ^delete | ^rm
  5704. ^move | ^mv
  5705. ^rename
  5706. To get more information about each command run:
  5707. cm ^workspace <command> --^usage
  5708. cm ^workspace <command> --^help
  5709. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE ==
  5710. Examples:
  5711. cm ^workspace ^create myWorkspace wk_path
  5712. cm ^workspace ^list
  5713. cm ^workspace ^delete myWorkspace
  5714. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
  5715. Creates a new workspace.
  5716. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
  5717. Usage:
  5718. cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> [<rep_spec>]
  5719. [--^selector[=<selector_file>]
  5720. (Creates a new workspace.)
  5721. cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> --^dynamic --^tree=[<tree>]
  5722. (Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still experimental, and it's
  5723. only available for Windows.)
  5724. wk_name The new workspace name.
  5725. wk_path Path of the new workspace.
  5726. rep_spec Creates the new workspace with the specified repository.
  5727. Repository specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
  5728. Options:
  5729. --^selector Edits a selector for the new workspace.
  5730. If a selector file is specified, then sets the selector
  5731. for the new workspace from the specified file.
  5732. --^dynamic Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still
  5733. experimental, and it's only available for Windows.
  5734. Specifying this flag requires using the --^tree parameter.
  5735. --^tree Used with the '--^dynamic' flag, specifies the initial
  5736. point the dynamic workspace is going to load. It can
  5737. either be a branch, changeset, or label specification.
  5738. The workspace will later on use the repository in the
  5739. spec. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  5740. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
  5741. Remarks:
  5742. - A workspace is a view of the repository mapped to the local filesystem.
  5743. The workspace selector defines the rules that specify workspace content.
  5744. Use 'cm ^showselector' to display a workspace selector or 'cm ^setselector'
  5745. to modify it.
  5746. - If neither rep_spec nor '--^selector' is specified, then the workspace
  5747. will automatically be configured to use the first repository
  5748. (alphabetically) of the server configured in the client.conf file.
  5749. - The dynamic workspaces is a experimental feature (Windows only), and it
  5750. requires the plasticfs.exe program running.
  5751. Examples:
  5752. cm ^workspace ^create myworkspace c:\workspace
  5753. cm ^wk ^mk myworkspace /home/john/plastic_view
  5754. (Creates 'myworkspace' workspace in Windows and in Linux respectively.)
  5755. cm ^wk mywktest c:\wks\wktest --^selector=myselector.txt
  5756. (Creates 'mywktest' workspace using the selector in 'myselector.txt' file.)
  5757. cm ^wk mywkprj c:\wks\wkprj myrep@^repserver:localhost:8084
  5758. (Creates 'mywkprj' workspace with the selected repository.)
  5759. cm ^wk mywkprj c:\dynwks\mywkprj --^dynamic --^tree=^br:/main@myrep@localhost:8084
  5760. (Creates dynamic 'mywkprj' workspace with the 'myrep@localhost:8084'
  5761. repository, pointing to '^br:/main' the first time it gets mounted.)
  5762. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
  5763. Deletes a workspace.
  5764. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
  5765. Usage:
  5766. cm ^workspace | ^wk ^delete | ^rm [<wk_path> | <wkspec>] [--^keepmetadata]
  5767. wk_path Path of the workspace to be deleted.
  5768. wkspec Specification of the workspace to delete. (Use
  5769. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  5770. Options:
  5771. --^keepmetadata Does not delete the metadata files in the .plastic
  5772. folder.
  5773. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
  5774. Remarks:
  5775. This command deletes a workspace, specified by path or spec.
  5776. If no arguments are specified, current workspace will be assumed.
  5777. Examples:
  5778. cm ^workspace ^delete
  5779. (Removes current workspace.)
  5780. cm ^wk ^delete c:\workspace
  5781. cm ^workspace rm /home/danipen/wks
  5782. cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace
  5783. cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace@DIGITALIS
  5784. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
  5785. Lists workspaces.
  5786. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
  5787. Usage:
  5788. cm ^workspace | ^wk [^list | ^ls] [--^format=<str_format>]
  5789. Options:
  5790. --^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
  5791. Remarks for more info.
  5792. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
  5793. Remarks:
  5794. This command accepts a format string to show the output.
  5795. The output parameters of this command are the following:
  5796. {0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
  5797. {1} | {^machine} Client machine name.
  5798. {2} | {^path} Workspace path.
  5799. {3} | {^wkid} Workspace unique identifier.
  5800. {4} | {^wkspec} Workspace specification using the format:
  5801. 'wkname@machine'.
  5802. {^tab} Inserts a tab space.
  5803. {^newline} Inserts a new line.
  5804. Examples:
  5805. cm ^wk
  5806. (Lists all workspaces.)
  5807. cm ^workspace ^list --^format={0}#{3,40}
  5808. cm ^workspace ^list --^format={^wkname}#{^wkid,40}
  5809. (Lists all workspaces and shows the workspace name, a # symbol and the
  5810. workspace GUID field in 40 spaces, aligned to left.)
  5811. cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {0} in path {2}"
  5812. cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {^wkname} in path {^path}"
  5813. (Lists all workspaces and shows result as formatted strings.)
  5814. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
  5815. Moves a workspace.
  5816. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
  5817. Usage:
  5818. cm ^workspace | ^wk ^move | ^mv [<wkspec>] <new_path>
  5819. Options:
  5820. wkspec Specification of the workspace to move. (Use
  5821. 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
  5822. new_path Workspace will be moved to here.
  5823. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
  5824. Remarks:
  5825. This command allows users to move a workspace to another location on disk.
  5826. Examples:
  5827. cm ^workspace ^move myWorkspace \new\workspaceDirectory
  5828. (Moves 'myWorkspace' to the specified location.)
  5829. cm ^wk ^mv c:\users\maria\wkspaces\newlocation
  5830. (Moves the current workspace to the new location.)
  5831. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
  5832. Renames a workspace.
  5833. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
  5834. Usage:
  5835. cm ^workspace | ^wk ^rename [<wk_name>] <new_name>
  5836. wk_name Workspace to rename.
  5837. new_name New name for the workspace.
  5838. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
  5839. Remarks:
  5840. This command renames a workspace.
  5841. If no workspace name is supplied, the current workspace will be used.
  5842. Examples:
  5843. cm ^workspace ^rename mywk1 wk2
  5844. (Renames the workspace 'mywk1' to 'wk2'.)
  5845. cm ^wk ^rename newname
  5846. (Renames the current workspace to 'newname'.)
  5847. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
  5848. Shows changes in the workspace.
  5849. == CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
  5850. Usage:
  5851. cm ^status [<wk_path>] [--^changelist[=<name>] | --^changelists] [--^cutignored]
  5852. [ --^header] [ --^noheader] [ --^nomergesinfo] [ --^head]
  5853. [--^short] [--^symlink] [ --^dirwithchanges] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
  5854. [--^encoding=<name>] [ --^wrp | --^wkrootrelativepaths]
  5855. [--^fullpaths | --^fp] [<legacy_options>] [<search_types>[ ...]]
  5856. [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=sep]
  5857. [--^endlineseparator=sep] [--^fieldseparator=sep]]
  5858. Options:
  5859. wk_path Path of the workspace where the search will be
  5860. performed.
  5861. --^changelist Shows changes in the selected changelist.
  5862. --^changelists Shows changes grouped in client changelists.
  5863. --^cutignored Skips the contents of ignored directories.
  5864. Requires the '--^ignored' search type. See the Search
  5865. types section for more information.
  5866. --^header Only prints the workspace status.
  5867. --^noheader Only prints the modified item search result.
  5868. --^nomergesinfo Doesn't print the merge info for changes.
  5869. --^head Prints the status of the last changeset on the branch.
  5870. --^short Lists only paths that contains changes.
  5871. --^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
  5872. target.
  5873. --^dirwithchanges Shows directories that contain changes inside them
  5874. (added, moved, removed items inside).
  5875. --^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
  5876. It is possible to specify an output file.
  5877. --^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
  5878. use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
  5879. See the MSDN documentation at
  5880. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
  5881. to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
  5882. (at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
  5883. --^wrp Print workspace root relative paths instead of
  5884. current directory relative paths.
  5885. --^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing absolute paths, overriding any other
  5886. path printing setting.
  5887. --^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
  5888. --^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5889. specifies how the lines should start.
  5890. --^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5891. specifies how the lines should end.
  5892. --^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
  5893. specifies how the fields should be separated.
  5894. Legacy options:
  5895. --^cset Prints the workspace status in the legacy format.
  5896. --^compact Prints the workspace status and changelists in the
  5897. legacy format.
  5898. --^noheaders When used in conjunction with the '--^compact' flag, the
  5899. changelist headers will not be printed. (Does not apply
  5900. to the new changelists format.)
  5901. Search types:
  5902. --^added Prints added items.
  5903. --^checkout Prints checkedout items.
  5904. --^changed Prints changed items.
  5905. --^copied Prints copied items.
  5906. --^replaced Prints replaced items.
  5907. --^deleted Prints deleted items.
  5908. --^localdeleted Prints locally deleted items.
  5909. --^moved Prints moved items.
  5910. --^localmoved Prints locally moved items.
  5911. --^percentofsimilarity=<value> Percent of similarity between two files in
  5912. order to consider them the same item. Used
  5913. in the locally moved search. Its default
  5914. value is 20%.
  5915. --^txtsameext Only those text files that have the same
  5916. extension will be taken into account by the
  5917. similarity content matching process during
  5918. the moved items search. By default, any
  5919. text file will be processed.
  5920. --^binanyext Any binary file will be taken into account
  5921. by the similarity content matching process
  5922. during the moved items search. By default,
  5923. only those binary files that have the same
  5924. extension will be processed.
  5925. --^private Prints non controlled items.
  5926. --^ignored Prints ignored items.
  5927. --^hiddenchanged Prints hidden changed items. (Includes
  5928. '--^changed')
  5929. --^cloaked Prints cloaked items.
  5930. --^controlledchanged This flag substitutes the following options:
  5931. '--^added', '--^checkout', '--^copied',
  5932. '--^replaced', '--^deleted', '--^moved'.
  5933. --^all This flag replaces the following parameters:
  5934. '--^controlledchanged', '--^changed',
  5935. '--^localdeleted', '--^localmoved', '--^private'.
  5936. == CMD_HELP_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
  5937. Remarks:
  5938. The '^status' command prints the loaded changeset on a workspace and gets
  5939. the changed elements inside the workspace.
  5940. This command can be used to show the pending changes in a workspace; the
  5941. type of changes that can be searched can be modified by using the command
  5942. parameters. By default, all changes are displayed, be they controlled
  5943. or local.
  5944. The percent of similarity parameter '--^percentofsimilarity' (-^p) is used
  5945. by the locally moved search to decide if two elements are the same item.
  5946. The default value is 20% but it can be adjusted.
  5947. It is possible to show workspace changes grouped by client changelists.
  5948. The '^default' changelist includes the changes that are not included in
  5949. other changelists. That being said, the changes the default changelist
  5950. will show depends on the search types flags specified.
  5951. Showing changes grouped by changelists requires showing controlled
  5952. changes too (items with status equal to '^added', '^checkout', '^copied',
  5953. '^replaced', '^deleted', or '^moved'). So, the '--^controlledchanged' option
  5954. will be automatically enabled when changelists are shown.
  5955. The default encoding for XML output is utf-8.
  5956. By default, this command will print current directory relative paths,
  5957. unless the '--^machinereadable' or '--^short' flags are specified. If
  5958. any of them are specified, the command will print absolute paths.
  5959. If '--^xml' flag is specified, workspace root relative paths will
  5960. be printed (unless the '--^fp' flag is also specified, printing
  5961. absolute paths instead).
  5962. Examples:
  5963. cm ^status
  5964. (Prints the working changeset and also all item types changed in the
  5965. workspace, except the ignored ones.)
  5966. cm ^status --^controlledchanged
  5967. (Prints the working changeset and also the items that are checkedout, added,
  5968. copied, replaced, deleted, and moved.)
  5969. cm ^status --^added
  5970. (Prints only the working changeset and the added items inside the workspace.)
  5971. cm ^status c:\workspaceLocation\code\client --^added
  5972. (Prints the working changeset and the added items under the specified path
  5973. recursively.)
  5974. cm ^status --^changelists
  5975. cm ^status --^changelist
  5976. (Shows all the workspace changes grouped by client changelists.)
  5977. cm ^status --^changelist=pending_to_review
  5978. (Shows the changes on the changelist named 'pending_to_review'.)
  5979. cm ^status --^changelist=default --^private
  5980. (Shows the changes in the 'default' changelist, showing private items, along
  5981. with items with controlled changes, if any.)
  5982. cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
  5983. (Checkins the changes in the changelist 'pending_to_review'.)
  5984. cm ^status C:\workspaceLocation --^xml=output.xml
  5985. (Gets the status information in XML format and using utf-8 in the file
  5986. output.xml.)
  5987. cm ^status --^ignored
  5988. (Shows all ignored items.)
  5989. Output:
  5990. /main@myrepo@local (^cs:2 - ^head)
  5991. ^Added
  5992. Status Size Last Modified Path
  5993. ^Ignored 0 bytes 19 seconds ago out\app.exe
  5994. ^Ignored 48 seconds ago src
  5995. ^Ignored 0 bytes 48 seconds ago src\version.c
  5996. cm ^status --^ignored --^cutignored
  5997. (Shows ignored files whose parent directory is not ignored and ignored
  5998. directories but not their contents.)
  5999. Output:
  6000. /main@myrepo@local (^cs:2 - ^head)
  6001. ^Added
  6002. Status Size Last Modified Path
  6003. ^Ignored 0 bytes 19 seconds ago out\app.exe
  6004. ^Ignored 48 seconds ago src
  6005. == CMD_DESCRIPTION_XLINK ==
  6006. Creates, edits, or displays details of an Xlink.
  6007. == CMD_USAGE_XLINK ==
  6008. Usage:
  6009. cm ^xlink [-^w] [-^rs] <xlink_path> / (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec)>
  6010. [<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
  6011. (Creates an Xlink.)
  6012. cm ^xlink [-^rs] <xlink_path> /<relative_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
  6013. [<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
  6014. (Creates a readonly partial Xlink pointing to /<relative_path> instead of
  6015. the default root / .)
  6016. cm ^xlink -^e <xlink_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
  6017. (Edits an Xlink to change the target specification.)
  6018. cm ^xlink -^s|--^show <xlink_path>
  6019. (Shows the Xlink information including the expansion rules.)
  6020. cm ^xlink -^ar|--^addrules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
  6021. (Adds the given expansion rules to the Xlink).
  6022. cm ^xlink -^dr|--^deleterules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
  6023. (Removes the given expansion rules from the Xlink).
  6024. xlink_path This is the directory in the current workspace where
  6025. the linked repository will be mounted (when creating an
  6026. Xlink) or is mounted (when editing an Xlink).
  6027. csetspec The full target changeset specification in the remote
  6028. repository.
  6029. This determines what version and branch is loaded in the
  6030. workspace for the linked repository.
  6031. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
  6032. specs.)
  6033. lbspec The full label specification in the remote repository.
  6034. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
  6035. specs.)
  6036. brspec The full branch specification in the remote repository.
  6037. This uses the current changeset where the specified
  6038. branch is pointing to. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
  6039. learn more about branch specs.)
  6040. -^e Edits an existing Xlink to change the target changeset
  6041. specification.
  6042. -^s | --^show Shows information about the selected Xlink.
  6043. -^ar | --^addrules Adds one or more expansion rules to the selected Xlink.
  6044. -^dr | --^deleterules Deletes one or more expansion rules from the selected
  6045. Xlink.
  6046. expansion_rules To specify one or more expansion rule. Each expansion
  6047. rule is a pair branch-target branch:
  6048. ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
  6049. Options:
  6050. -^w Indicates that the Xlink is writable. This means that
  6051. the contents of the target repository can be modified
  6052. through branch autoexpansion.
  6053. -^rs Relative server. This option allows creating a relative
  6054. Xlink that is independent of the repository server. This
  6055. way, Xlinks created in replicated repositories in
  6056. different servers will be automatically identified.
  6057. == CMD_HELP_XLINK ==
  6058. Remarks:
  6059. This command creates an Xlink to a given changeset. By default, a read-only
  6060. Xlink is created. This means that the contents loaded in the workspace
  6061. inside the Xlink cannot be modified. To be able to make changes in the
  6062. Xlinked content, create a writable Xlink instead (using the '-^w' option).
  6063. It is possible to use a simplified syntax of the command when editing the
  6064. target changeset of an Xlink. This way, the only required parameter is the
  6065. new target changeset. The rest of parameters of the Xlink will not be
  6066. modified.
  6067. Branch auto-expansion:
  6068. When a change is made in any writable-xlinked repositories ('-^w' option), a
  6069. new branch needs to be created in the target repository. The name of the
  6070. new branch is based on the checkout branch defined in the top-level
  6071. repository. To determine the name of the branch to use, these rules apply:
  6072. 1) A check is made to see if a branch with the same full name exists
  6073. in the target repository:
  6074. - If it exists, this is used as the checkout branch.
  6075. - If it does not exist, the branch name is built this way:
  6076. - Name of the branch of the target Xlinked changeset + short name of
  6077. the checkout branch (last part).
  6078. - If this branch exists, it is used as the checkout branch.
  6079. - Otherwise, the branch is created and the branch base is set to the
  6080. Xlinked changeset.
  6081. 2) A new version of the Xlink is created in the branch on the parent
  6082. repository pointing to the new changeset in the Xlinked repository.
  6083. Finally, the complete Xlink structure is kept up to date with the latest
  6084. changes in the right versions.
  6085. Examples:
  6086. cm ^xlink code\firstrepo / 1@first@localhost:8084
  6087. (Creates an Xlink in folder 'firstrepo' in the current workspace where the
  6088. changeset '1' in the repository 'first' will be mounted.)
  6089. cm ^xlink opengl\include /includes/opengl 1627@includes@localhost:8087
  6090. (Creates a readonly partial Xlink in directory 'opengl\include' in the
  6091. current workspace where the path '/includes/opengl' in changeset '1627' in
  6092. the repository 'includes' will be mounted as root. It means that whatever
  6093. is inside '/includes/opengl' will be mounted in 'opengl\include' while the
  6094. rest of the repository will be ignored.)
  6095. cm ^xlink -^w -^rs code\secondrepo / ^lb:LB001@second@localhost:8084
  6096. (Creates a writable and relative Xlink in folder 'secondrepo' in the
  6097. current workspace where the label 'LB001' in the repository 'second' will
  6098. be mounted.)
  6099. cm ^xlink code\thirdrepo / 3@third@localhost:8087 ^br:/main-^br:/main/scm003
  6100. (Creates an Xlink in folder 'thirdrepo' in the current workspace where the
  6101. changeset '3' in the repository 'third' will be mounted.)
  6102. cm ^xlink -^e code\secondrepo ^br:/main/task1234@second@localhost:8084
  6103. (Edits the Xlink 'code\secondrepo' to change the target repository by
  6104. linking the branch 'main/task1234' in the repository 'second'.)
  6105. cm ^xlink --^show code\thirdrepo
  6106. (Shows information of the Xlink 'code\thirdrepo' including its expansion
  6107. rules if exist).
  6108. cm ^xlink -^ar code\secondrepo ^br:/main-^br:/main/develop ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
  6109. (Adds two expansion rules to the xlink 'code\secondrepo'.)
  6110. cm ^xlink -^dr code\secondrepo ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
  6111. (Deletes the expansion rule from the xlink 'code\secondrepo').
  6112. == CMD_USAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
  6113. Usage:
  6114. cm ^autocomplete ^install
  6115. (Installs 'cm' command completion in the shell.)
  6116. cm ^autocomplete ^uninstall
  6117. (Uninstalls 'cm' command completion from the shell.)
  6118. cm ^autocomplete --^line <shell_line> --^position <cursor_position>
  6119. (Returns autocomplete suggestions for 'shell_line' to be inserted at
  6120. 'cursor_position'. This command is not intended to be used by the final
  6121. user, but it is documented in case you want to extend autocompletion
  6122. support for your shell of choice.)
  6123. shell_line The line the user has written into the shell when the
  6124. autocompletion was requested.
  6125. In Bash, it is at the COMP_LINE environment variable.
  6126. In PowerShell, it is at the $wordToComplete variable.
  6127. cursor_position The position of the cursor when the autocompletion was
  6128. requested.
  6129. In Bash, it is at the COMP_POINT environment variable.
  6130. In PowerShell, it is at the $cursorPosition variable.